Exhibit
    A
    to
    Appendix
    BSpecificatiöns
    and
    Test
    Procedures
    1.
    Installation
    and
    Measurement
    Location
    1.1
    Gas
    and
    Mercury
    Monitors
    Following
    the
    procedures
    in
    Section
    8.1.1
    of
    Performance
    Specification
    2
    in
    Appendix
    B
    to
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    install the
    pollutant
    concentration
    monitor
    or
    monitoring
    system
    at
    a
    location
    where
    the
    pollutant
    concentration
    and
    emission
    rate
    measurements
    are
    directly
    representative
    of
    the
    total
    emissions
    from
    the
    affected
    unit. Select
    a
    representative
    measurement
    point
    or
    path
    for
    the
    monitor
    probe(s)
    (or
    for
    the
    path
    from
    the
    transmitter
    to
    the
    receiver)
    such
    that
    the
    CO
    2
    Q
    2
    ,
    concentration
    monitoring
    system,
    mercury
    concentration
    monitoring
    system,
    or
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system
    will
    pass
    the
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    (see
    Section
    6
    of
    this
    Exhibit).
    It
    is
    recommended
    that
    monitor
    measurements
    be
    made
    at locations
    where
    the
    exhaust
    gas
    temperature
    is
    above
    the
    dew-point
    temperature.
    If
    the
    cause
    of
    failure
    to
    meet
    the
    relative
    accuracy
    tests
    is
    determined
    to
    be
    the
    measurement
    location,
    relocate
    the
    monitor
    probe(s).
    1.1.1
    Point
    Monitors
    Locate
    the
    measurement
    point
    (1)
    within
    the
    centroidal
    area
    of
    the
    stack
    or
    duct
    cross
    section,
    or
    no
    less
    than
    1.0
    meter
    from
    the
    stack
    or
    duct
    wall.
    1.2
    Flow
    Monitors
    Install
    the
    flow
    monitor
    in
    a
    location
    that
    provides
    representative
    volumetric
    flow
    over
    all
    operatjpg
    conditions.
    Such
    a
    location
    is
    one
    that
    provides
    an average
    velocity
    of
    the
    flue gas
    flow
    over
    the
    stack
    or
    duct
    cross section
    and
    is
    representative
    of
    the
    pollutant
    concentration
    monitor
    location.
    Where
    the
    moisture
    content
    of
    the•
    flue
    gas
    affects
    volumetric
    flow
    measurements,
    use
    the
    procedures
    in
    both
    Reference
    Methods
    1
    and
    4
    of
    Appendix
    A
    to
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    to
    establish
    a
    proper
    location
    for
    the
    flow
    monitor.
    The
    Illinois
    EPA
    recommends
    (but
    does
    not
    require)
    performing
    a
    flow
    profile
    study
    following
    the
    procedures
    in
    40
    CFR
    part 60,
    appendix
    A,
    Method,
    1,
    Sections
    11.5
    or
    11.4,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    for
    each
    of
    the three
    operating
    or
    load levels
    indicated
    in
    Section
    6.5.2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    to
    determine
    the acceptability
    of
    the
    potential
    flow
    monitor
    location
    and
    to
    determine
    the
    number
    and
    location
    of
    flow sampling
    points
    required
    to
    obtain
    a
    representative
    flow
    value.
    The
    procedure
    in
    40
    CFR
    part 60, Appendix
    A,
    Test
    Method
    1,
    Section
    11.5,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    may be
    used
    even
    if
    the
    flow
    measurement
    location
    is
    greater
    than
    or
    equal
    to
    2
    equivalent
    stack
    or
    duct diameters
    downstream
    or
    greater
    than
    or
    equal
    to
    1/2
    duct
    diameter
    upstream
    from
    a
    flow disturbance.
    If
    a
    flow
    profile
    study
    shows
    that
    cyclonic (or
    swirling)
    or
    stratified
    flow
    conditions
    exist
    at
    the
    potential
    flow
    monitor
    location
    that
    are
    likely
    to
    prevent
    the
    monitor
    from
    meeting
    the performance
    specifications
    of
    this
    part,
    then
    the
    Agency
    recommends
    either
    (1) selectjpg
    1

    another location where
    there
    is
    no
    cyclonic (or
    swirling)
    or stratified
    flow
    condition,
    or
    (2)
    eliminating
    the
    cyclonic
    (or swirling)
    or stratified
    flow condition
    by straightening
    the
    flow,
    e.g.Jy
    installing
    straightening vanes.
    The Agency
    also recommends
    selecting
    flow monitor
    locations
    to
    minimize
    the effects
    of condensation,
    coating, erosion,
    or other conditions
    that
    could
    adversely
    affect
    flow
    monitor
    performance.
    1.2.1
    Acceptability
    of Monitor
    Location
    The installation of a flow
    monitor is acceptable
    if either
    (1)
    the location
    satisfies the
    minimum
    sjjpg
    criteria
    of
    Method 1 in Appendix
    A to
    40 CFR 60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in Section
    225.140
    (i.e.,
    the location is
    greater
    than
    or
    equal
    to eight stack or duct
    diameters
    downstream
    and two
    diameters
    upstream
    from a
    flow
    disturbance;
    or, if
    necessary,
    two
    stack or duct
    diameters downstream
    and
    one-
    half stack or duct diameter
    upstream
    from
    a flow
    disturbance),
    or
    (2)
    the results
    of a flow
    profile
    study,
    if
    performed,
    are
    acceptable
    (i.e.. there are
    no cyclonic
    (or
    swirling)
    or
    stratified
    flow
    conditions),
    and the
    flow
    monitor also satisfies
    the performance
    specifications
    of this
    part. If
    the
    flow
    monitor is
    installed
    in
    a location
    that
    does not
    satisfy these physical
    criteria,
    but
    nevertheless
    the
    monitor achieves
    the performance
    specifications of
    this
    part,
    then
    the location
    is
    acceptable,
    notwithstanding the
    requirements
    of this
    Section.
    1.2.2
    Alternative Monitoring
    Location
    Whenever
    the owner or
    operator
    successfullydemonstrates
    that
    modifications
    to the
    exhaust
    duct
    or
    stack
    (such
    as installation
    of straightening
    vanes, modifications
    of ductwork,
    and
    the
    like)
    are
    necessary
    for the flow
    monitor to meet
    the
    performance
    specifications,
    the Agency
    may
    approve
    an
    interim
    alternative
    flow monitoring methodology
    and
    an
    extension
    to the required
    certification
    date
    for
    the
    flow monitor.
    ‘Where
    no location
    exists
    that
    satisfies
    the physical
    siting criteria
    in Section
    1.2.1, where
    the
    results
    of
    flow profile
    studies
    performed
    at
    two
    or
    more alternative
    flow monitor locations
    are
    unacceptable,
    or
    where
    installation
    of
    a flow monitor
    in either the stack
    or the
    ducts
    is
    demonstrated
    to
    be
    technically
    infeasible, the
    owner or operator
    may
    petition
    the Agency for
    an alternative
    method
    for
    monitoring
    flow.
    2. Equipment
    Specifications
    2.1 Instrument
    Span
    and Range
    In
    implementing
    Sections 2.1.1
    through 2.1.2
    of this Exhibit,
    set
    the
    measurement
    range
    for
    each
    parameter
    (COQ
    2
    ,
    or
    flow rate)
    high
    enough
    to prevent
    full-scale exceedances
    from
    occurring,
    yet
    low
    enough to
    ensure
    good measurement
    accuracy
    and to maintain
    a high
    signal-to-noise
    ratio.
    To
    meet
    these
    objectives,
    select
    the
    range such that the
    majority
    of the
    readings
    obtained
    during
    typical
    unit
    operation
    are kept, to the
    extent practicable,
    between
    20.0
    and 80.0 percent
    of the
    full-scale
    range
    of
    the
    instrument.
    2

    2.1.1
    CO
    2
    and
    02
    Monitors
    For
    an
    02
    monitor
    (including
    02
    monitors
    used
    to
    measure
    CO
    2
    emissions
    or
    percentage
    moisture),
    select
    a
    span
    value
    between
    15.0
    and
    25.0
    percent
    02.
    For
    a
    CO
    2
    monitor
    installed
    on
    a
    boiler,
    select
    a
    span
    value
    between
    140
    and
    20.0
    percent
    CO
    2
    .
    For
    a
    CO, monitor
    installed
    on
    a
    combustion
    turbine,
    an
    alternative
    span value
    between
    6.0
    and
    14.0
    percent
    CO
    may
    be
    used.
    An
    alternative
    cQ2
    span value
    below
    6.0
    percent
    may be
    used
    if
    an
    appropriate
    technical
    justification
    is
    included
    in
    the
    hardcopy
    monitoring
    plan.
    An
    alternative
    02
    span value
    below
    15.0
    percent
    02
    may
    be
    used
    if
    an
    appropriate
    technical
    justification
    is
    included
    in
    the
    monitoring
    plan (e.g.,
    02
    concentrations
    above
    a
    certain
    level
    create
    an
    unsafe
    operating
    condition).
    Select
    the
    full-scale
    range
    of
    the
    instrument
    to
    be
    consistent
    with
    Section
    2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    and
    to
    be
    greater
    than
    or
    equal
    to
    the
    span
    value.
    Select
    the
    calibration
    gas
    concentrations
    for
    the
    daily
    calibration
    error
    tests
    and
    linearity
    checks
    in
    accordance
    with
    Section
    5.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    as
    percentages
    of
    the
    span
    value.
    For
    02
    monitors
    with
    span
    values
    >=21.0
    percent
    02,
    purified
    instrument
    air
    containing
    20.9
    percenL02
    may
    be
    used
    as
    the
    high-level
    calibration
    material.
    If
    a
    dual-range
    or
    autoranging
    diluent
    analyzer
    is
    installed,
    the
    analyzer
    may
    be
    represented
    in
    the
    monitoring
    plan
    as
    a
    single
    component,
    using
    a
    special
    component
    type
    code
    specified
    by
    the
    USEPA
    to
    satisfy
    the
    requirements
    of
    40
    CFR
    75.53(e)(1)(iv)(D),
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140.
    2.1.2
    Flow
    Monitors
    Select
    the
    full-scale
    range
    of
    the
    flow
    monitor
    so
    that
    it
    is
    consistent
    with
    Section
    2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    and
    can
    accurately
    measure
    all
    potential
    volumetric
    flow
    rates
    at
    the
    flow
    monitor
    installation
    site.
    2.1.2.1
    Maximum
    Potential
    Velocity
    and
    Flow
    Rate
    For
    this
    purpose,
    determine
    the
    span
    value
    of
    the
    flow
    monitor
    using
    the
    following
    procedure.
    Calculate
    the
    maximum
    potential
    velocity
    (MPV)
    using
    Equation
    A-3a
    or
    A-3b or
    determine
    the
    MPV
    (wet
    basis)
    from
    velocity
    traverse
    testing
    using
    Reference
    Method
    2
    (or
    its
    allowable
    alternatives)
    in
    appendix
    A
    to
    40
    CFR
    60, incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140.
    If
    using
    test
    values,
    use
    the
    highest
    average
    velocity
    (determined
    from the
    Method
    2
    traverses)
    measured
    at
    or
    near
    the
    maximum
    unit
    operating
    load
    (or.
    for
    units that
    do
    not
    produce
    electrical
    or
    thermal
    output,
    at
    the
    normal
    process
    operating
    conditions
    corresponding
    to
    the
    maximum
    stack
    gas
    flow
    rate).
    Express
    the
    MPV
    in
    units
    of
    wet
    standard
    feet
    per
    minute
    (fpm).
    For
    the
    purpose
    of
    providing
    substitute
    data
    during
    periods
    of
    missing
    flow
    rate
    data
    in
    accordance
    with
    Sec
    75.31
    and
    75.33
    of
    40
    CFR
    Part
    75
    and
    as
    required
    elsewhere
    in
    this
    part, calculate
    the
    maximum
    potential
    stack
    gas
    flow
    rate
    (MPF)
    in
    units
    of
    standard
    cubic
    feet
    per
    hour
    (scth),
    as
    the
    product
    of
    the MPV
    (in
    units
    of
    wet,
    standard
    fpm) times
    60,
    times
    the
    cross-sectional
    area
    of
    the
    stack
    or
    duct
    (in
    fl
    2
    )
    at
    the flow
    monitor
    location.
    3

    (FdHY
    209
    ‘V
    100
    MPV
    I
    II
    II
    I
    (Equation
    A-3a)
    A
    J
    2
    O.
    9
    —%O
    2
    d).lOO—%H
    2
    O)
    or
    MPV
    = I
    (FH
    1
    Y
    II
    100
    1
    ii
    100
    I____________________
    I
    (Equation
    A-3b)
    A
    )%CO
    2d
    )L100—%H
    2
    0)
    Where:
    MPV maximum potential
    velocity
    (fpm,
    standard
    wet
    basis).
    = dry-basis F factor
    (dscf7mmBtu)
    from Table 1, Section
    3.3.5 of
    Appenfix
    F ,
    40
    CFR
    Part
    75.
    = carbon-based F
    factor
    (scf C0
    2
    /mmBtu)
    from Table
    1,
    Section
    3.3.5 of
    Appenfix
    F
    , 40
    CFR
    Part 75.
    Hf = maximum
    heat
    input (mmBtu!minute)
    for
    all
    units,
    combined, exhausting
    to the
    stack
    or
    duct
    where
    the
    flow monitor
    is
    located.
    A
    inside cross
    sectional area
    (fl
    2)
    of the flue
    at
    the flow monitor location.
    °2d
    = maximum
    oxygen concentration,
    percent
    dry basis, under normal
    operating
    conditions.
    %CO
    2d
    = minimum
    carbon dioxide
    concentration,
    percent
    dry
    basis,
    under
    normal
    operating
    conditions.
    %H
    20
    = maximum percent
    flue gas moisture
    content under
    normal
    operating
    conditions.
    2.1.2.2
    Span
    Values
    and Range
    Determine
    the span
    and range of the flow
    monitor
    as follows.
    Convert
    the
    MPV,
    as
    determined
    in
    Section
    2.1
    .2.1
    of this Exhibit, to
    the same
    measurement
    units
    of flow rate
    that are used
    for
    dfly
    calibration
    error tests (e.g., scfh,
    kscth, kacfrn,
    or differential
    pressure(inches
    of
    water)Nex.
    determine
    the “calibration
    span
    value” by
    multiplying
    the
    MPV
    (có
    étejiT’1ent
    dailj
    calibration error
    units)
    by a factor no less
    than 1.00
    and
    no
    greater
    than 1.25, and
    rounding
    up
    the
    result
    to
    at
    least two
    significant figures.
    For calibration
    span values in
    inches of water,
    retain
    at
    least
    two
    decimal
    places. Select
    appropriate
    reference
    signals for the
    daily calibration
    error
    tests
    as
    percentages
    of the calibration
    span
    value,
    as
    specified
    in Section
    2.2.2.1 of
    this
    Exhibit.
    Finally
    calculate
    the “flow rate span
    value”
    (in
    scth)
    as
    the
    product
    of the
    MPF,
    as determined
    in
    Section
    2.1.2.1 of this
    Exhibit, times the
    same factor
    (between
    1.00 and
    1.25)
    that was
    used
    to
    calculate
    the
    calibration
    span value. Round
    off the flow rate
    span
    value
    to
    the nearest
    1000 scth.
    Select
    the
    full
    4

    scale
    range
    of
    the
    flow
    monitor
    so
    that
    it
    is
    greater
    than
    or
    equal
    to
    the
    span
    value
    and
    is
    consistent
    with
    Section
    2
    1
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    Include
    in
    the
    morntonng
    plan
    for
    the
    unit
    calculations
    of
    the
    MPV
    MPF,
    calibration
    span
    value,
    flow
    rate
    span
    value,
    and
    full-scale
    range
    (expressed
    both
    in
    seth
    and,
    if
    different.
    in
    the
    measurement
    units
    of
    calibration).
    2.1.2.3
    Adjustment
    of
    Span
    and
    Range
    For
    each
    affected
    unit
    or
    common
    stack,
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    must
    make
    a
    periodic
    evaluation
    of
    the
    MPV,
    span,
    and
    range
    values
    for
    each
    flow
    rate
    monitor
    (at
    a
    minimum,
    an
    annual
    evaluation
    is
    required)
    and
    must
    make
    any
    necessary
    span
    and
    range
    adjustments
    with
    corresponding
    monitoring
    plan
    updates,
    as
    described
    in
    paragraphs
    (a)
    through
    (c)
    of
    this
    Section
    2.1.2.3.
    Span
    and
    range
    adjustments
    may
    be
    required,
    for
    example,
    as
    a
    result
    of
    changes
    in
    the
    fuel
    supply,
    changes
    in
    the
    stack
    or
    ductwork
    configuration,
    changes
    in
    the
    manner
    of
    operation
    of
    the
    unit,
    or
    installation
    or
    removal
    of
    emission
    controls.
    In
    implementing
    the
    provisions
    in
    paragraphs
    (a)
    and
    (b)
    of
    this
    Section
    2.1.2.3,
    note
    that
    flow
    rate
    data
    recorded
    during
    short-term,
    non-representative
    operating
    conditions
    (e.g..
    a
    trial
    bum
    of
    a
    different
    type
    of
    fuel)
    must
    be
    excluded
    from
    consideration.
    The
    owner.
    or
    operator
    must
    keep
    the
    results
    of
    the
    most
    recent
    span
    and.
    range
    evaluation
    on-site,
    in
    a
    format
    suitable
    for
    inspection.
    Make
    each
    required
    span
    or
    range
    adjustment
    no
    later
    than
    45
    days
    after
    the
    end
    of
    the
    quarter
    in
    which
    the
    need
    to
    adjust
    the
    span
    or
    range
    is
    identified.
    (a)
    If
    the
    fuel
    supply,
    stack
    or
    ductwork
    configuration,
    operating
    parameters,
    or
    other
    conditions
    change
    such
    that
    the
    maximum
    potential
    flow
    rate
    changes
    significantly,
    adjust
    the
    span
    and
    range
    to
    assure
    the
    continued
    accuracy
    of
    the
    flow
    monitor.
    A
    “significant”
    change
    in
    the
    MPV
    means
    that
    the
    guidelines
    of
    Section
    2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    can
    no
    longer
    be
    met,
    as
    determined
    by
    either
    a
    periodic
    evaluation
    by
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    or
    from
    the
    results
    of
    an
    audit
    by
    the
    Agency.
    The
    owner
    or
    operator
    should
    evaluate
    whether
    any
    planned
    changes
    in
    operation
    of
    theunit
    may
    affect
    the
    flow
    of
    the
    unit
    or
    stack
    and
    should
    plan
    any
    necessary
    span
    and
    range
    changes
    needed
    to
    account
    for
    these
    changes,
    so
    that
    they
    are
    made
    in
    as
    timely
    a
    manner
    as
    practicable
    to
    coordinate
    with
    the
    operational
    changes.
    Calculate
    the
    adjusted
    calibration
    span
    and
    flow
    rate
    span
    values
    using
    the
    procedures
    in
    Section
    2.1.2.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    (b)
    Whenever
    the
    full-scale
    range
    is
    exceeded
    during
    a
    quarter,
    provided
    that
    the
    exceedance
    is
    not
    caused
    by
    a
    monitor
    out-of-control
    period,
    report
    200.0
    percent
    of
    the
    current
    full-scale
    range
    as
    the
    hourly
    flow
    rate
    for
    each
    hour
    of
    the
    full-scale
    exceedance.
    If
    the
    range
    is
    exceeded,
    make
    appropriate
    adjustments
    to
    the
    flow
    rate
    span,
    and
    range
    to
    prevent
    future
    full-scale
    exceedances.
    Calculate
    the
    new
    calibration
    span
    value
    by
    converting
    the
    new
    flow
    rate
    span
    value
    from
    units
    of
    seth
    to
    units
    of
    daily
    calibration.
    A
    calibration
    error
    test
    must
    be
    performed
    and
    passed
    to
    validate
    data
    on
    the
    new
    range.
    (c)
    Whenever
    changes
    are
    made
    to
    the
    MPV,
    full-scale
    range,
    or
    span
    value
    of
    the
    flow
    monitor,
    as
    described
    in
    paragraphs
    (a)
    and
    (b)
    of
    this
    Section,
    record
    and
    report
    (as
    applicable)
    the
    new
    full
    scale
    range
    setting,
    calculations
    of
    the
    flow
    rate
    span
    value,
    calibration
    span
    value,
    and
    MPV
    in
    an
    updated
    monitoring
    plan
    for
    the
    unit.
    The
    monitoring
    plan
    update
    must
    be
    made
    in
    the
    quarter
    in
    5

    which
    the
    changes become effective. Record and report the adjusted calibration span
    and
    reference
    values
    as
    parts
    of
    the records for the
    calibration
    error test required by
    Exhibit
    B
    to this Appendix.
    Whenever
    the
    calibration span value is
    adjusted,
    use
    reference values for
    the
    calibration
    error
    test
    that
    meet the requirements of
    Section 2.2.2.1
    of this Exhibit, based on the most recent
    adjusted
    calibration span value. Perform a
    calibration
    error test according to Section 2.1 .1 of Exhibit
    B to
    this
    Appendix whenever
    making
    a
    change
    to
    the flow monitor span or range, unless the
    range
    change
    also triggers a
    recertification under Section 1.4
    of
    this
    Appendix.
    2.1.3 Mercury Mpnitors
    Determine the appropriate span and range
    value(s)
    for each mercury
    pollutant
    concentration
    monitor,
    so that all
    expected
    mercury concentrations can be determined accurately.
    2.1.3.1 Maximum Potential Concentration
    The maximum
    potential
    concentration depends upon the type of coal combusted in
    the unit.
    For
    the
    initial MPC
    determination, there are three options:
    (1)
    Use
    one of the
    following default values:
    9 fig/scm for bituminous coal; 10 pjg/scm
    for sub-
    bituminous coal; 16
    iig/scm
    for
    lignite,
    and
    1
    jig/scm
    for waste
    coal, i.e., anthracite
    cuim
    or
    bituminous gob. If
    different coals are blended, use the highest
    MPC for any fuel in the blend;
    or
    (2)
    You may
    base
    the MPC on the results of site-specific emission
    testing using
    the
    one
    of
    the
    mercury reference
    methods in Section 1.6 of this Appendix, if
    the
    unit
    does not
    have
    add-on
    mercury
    emission
    controls or a flue gas desulfurization system, or if you test upstream
    of these
    control
    devices.
    A
    minimum
    of 3 test runs are required, at the normal operating load. Use the
    highest
    total
    mercury
    concentration obtained
    in
    any
    of the tests as the
    MPC;
    or
    (3)
    You may
    base
    the MPC on 720 or more hours of historical CEMS data or data
    from
    a
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system,
    if the
    unit does not have add-on mercury
    emission controls
    or a
    flue
    gas
    desulfurization
    system
    (or
    if the CEMS or sorbent trap system is located upstream
    of these
    control
    devices)
    and if
    the mercury CEMS or sorbent
    trap
    system has been tested for relative
    accuracy
    against one
    of the
    mercury
    reference methods in Section
    1.6 of this Appendix and has
    met
    a relative
    accuracy
    specification of 20.0%
    or
    less.
    2.1.3.2 Maximum ExpectedConcentration
    For units
    with FGD
    systems that significantly reduce
    mercury
    emissions
    (including
    fluidized
    bed
    units that
    use limestone
    injection) and for units
    equipped
    with
    add-on mercury emission
    controls
    (e.g.,
    carbon
    injection),
    determine
    the maximum expected mercury
    concentration
    (MEC)
    during
    normal,
    stable
    operation of the unit and emission controls. To calculate the MEC,
    substitute
    the
    MPC
    value from
    Section
    2.1.3.1
    of
    this Exhibit into Equation
    A-2 in Section 2.1.1.2 of
    Appendix
    A to
    40
    6

    CFR
    75,
    incoorated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140.
    For
    units
    with
    add-on
    mercury
    emission
    controls,
    base
    the
    percent
    removal
    efficiency on
    design
    engineering
    calculations.
    For
    units
    with
    FGD
    systems,
    use
    the
    best available
    estimate
    of
    the
    mercury
    removal
    efficiency
    of
    the
    FGD
    system.
    2.1.3.3
    Span
    and
    Range
    Value(s)
    (a)
    For each
    mercury
    monitor,
    determine
    a
    high
    span
    value,
    by
    rounding
    the
    MPC
    value
    from
    Section
    2.1
    .3.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    upward
    to
    the
    next highest
    multiple
    of
    10
    jig/scm.
    (b)
    For
    an affected
    unit equipped
    with
    an
    FGD
    system
    or
    a
    unit
    with
    add-on
    mercury
    emission
    controls,
    if
    the
    MEC value
    from
    Section
    2.1.3.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    is
    less
    than
    20
    percent
    of
    the
    high
    span
    value from
    paragraph
    (a)
    of
    this
    Section,
    and
    if
    the
    high
    span
    value
    is
    20
    jig/scm
    or
    greater,
    define
    a
    second,
    low
    span value
    of
    10
    jig/scm.
    (c)
    If
    only
    a
    high
    span
    value
    is
    required,
    set
    the
    full-scale
    range
    of
    the
    mercury
    analyzer
    to
    be
    greater
    than
    or
    equal
    to
    the
    span
    value.
    (d)
    If
    two span values
    arecqiiired,
    you
    may either:
    (1)
    Use
    two separate
    (high
    and
    low)
    measurement
    scales,
    setting
    the
    range
    of
    each
    scale
    to
    be
    greater
    than
    or
    equal to
    the
    high or
    low
    span
    value,
    as
    appropriate
    or
    (2)
    Quality-assure
    two segments
    of
    a
    single measurement
    scale.
    2.1.3.4
    Adjustment
    of
    Span
    and Range
    For
    each affected
    unit
    or
    common
    stack,
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    must
    make
    a periodic
    evaluation
    of
    the
    MPC,
    MEC,
    span,
    and
    range values
    for
    each
    mercury
    monitor
    (at
    a
    minimum,
    an
    annual
    evaluation
    is
    required)
    and must
    make
    any
    necessary
    span
    and
    range
    adjustments,
    with
    corresponding
    monitoring
    plan
    updates.
    Span
    and
    range
    adjustments
    may be
    required,
    for
    example,
    as
    a
    result
    of
    changes
    in the
    fuel
    supply,
    changes
    in
    the
    manner
    of
    operation
    of
    the
    unit,
    or
    installation
    or
    removal
    of
    emission
    controls.
    In
    implementing
    the
    provisions
    in
    paragraphs
    (a)
    and
    (b)
    of
    this
    Section,
    data
    recorded
    during
    short-term,
    non-representative
    process
    operating
    conditions
    (e.g.,
    a trial bum
    of
    a
    different
    type
    of
    fuel)
    must
    be
    excluded
    from
    consideration.
    The
    owner
    or
    operator
    must keep
    the
    results
    of
    the
    most
    recentpan
    and
    range
    evaluation
    on-site,
    in
    a
    format
    suitable
    for
    inspection
    Make
    each required
    span
    r
    L
    110
    later
    trian
    45
    days
    after
    the
    end
    of
    the quarter
    in
    which
    he
    ttie
    span
    or
    range
    is
    identified
    except
    that
    up
    to
    90
    days
    after the
    end
    of
    that
    quarter
    may
    be
    taken
    to
    implement
    a
    span
    adjustment
    if
    the
    calibration
    gas
    concentrations
    currently
    being
    used
    for
    calibration
    error
    tests,
    system
    integrity
    checks,
    and
    lineariti
    checks
    are
    unsuitable
    for use
    with
    the
    new
    span
    value
    and
    new
    calibration
    materials
    must
    be
    ordered.
    (a)
    The
    guidelines
    of
    Section
    2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    do
    not
    apply
    to
    mercury
    monitoring
    systems.
    7

    (b)
    Whenever
    a fu11sca1e range
    exceedanceoccursduring
    a quarter and
    is not’caused
    by a
    monitor
    out-of-control
    period,
    proceed
    as follows:
    (1) For monitors
    with
    a single
    measurement
    scale, report that
    the system
    was
    out of
    range
    and
    invalid
    data
    was
    obtained
    until the
    readings come back
    on-scale
    and, if
    appropriate,
    make
    adjustments
    to
    the
    MPC,
    span, and range
    to
    prevent
    future
    full-scale
    exceedances;
    or
    (2)
    For units with two
    separate measurement
    scales,
    if the low range
    is exceeded,
    no
    further
    action
    is
    required, provided
    that
    the
    high.range
    is available and
    is not out-of-control
    or
    out-of-service
    for
    any
    reason.
    However,
    if the high range
    is
    not able
    to provide
    quality
    assured
    data at the time
    of
    the
    low
    range exceedance
    or
    at
    any time
    during
    the continuation
    of the
    exceedance,
    report
    that
    the
    system
    was
    out-of-control
    until the readings
    return
    to the
    low range
    or until the high
    range is able
    to provide
    quality
    assured
    data
    (unless
    the
    reason that the high-scale
    range
    is
    not
    able to
    provide
    quality
    assured
    data
    is because
    the
    high-scale
    range
    has been exceeded;
    if the
    high-scale range
    is
    exceeded
    follow
    the procedures in
    paragraph
    (b)(l)
    of this
    Section).
    (c)
    Whenever changes
    are
    made
    to
    the
    MPC, MEC,
    full-scale range,
    or span
    value of. the
    mercury
    monitor, record
    and report
    (as
    applicable)
    the
    new
    full-scale
    range setting,
    the new
    MPC
    or
    MEC
    and calculations
    of the adjusted
    span value
    in an updated monitoring
    plan.
    The
    monitoring
    plan
    update
    must
    be made
    in
    the
    quarter in which
    the
    changes
    become
    effective.
    In addition,
    record
    and
    report
    the
    adjusted
    span as
    part
    of the records
    for
    the
    daily
    calibration
    error test and
    linearity
    check
    specified
    by
    Exhibit B
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    Whenever
    the
    span
    value is
    adjusted,
    use
    calibration
    gas
    concentrations
    that meet
    the
    requirements
    of Section 5.1
    of this Exhibit,
    based on
    the
    adjusted
    span
    value.
    When
    a
    span
    adjustment is
    so significant that
    the
    calibration
    gas concentrations
    currently
    being
    used
    for
    calibration error tests,
    system
    integrity
    checks
    and linearity
    checks are
    unsuitable
    for
    use with
    the new span value,
    then
    a
    diagnostic
    linearity or
    3-level
    system integrity
    check
    using
    the
    new
    calibration gas concentratiOns
    must
    be performed
    and passed.
    Use the
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)
    of this Appendix,
    beginning
    with
    the hour in which
    the
    span
    is
    changed.
    2.2
    Design
    for
    Quality
    Control
    Testing
    2.2.1
    Pollutant Concentration
    and
    CO
    2or
    02
    Monitors
    (a)
    Design
    and
    equip
    each
    pollutant
    concentration
    and
    CO
    2 or
    02
    monitor
    with
    a
    calibration
    gas
    injection
    port that
    allows
    a check of the entire
    measurement
    system
    when
    calibration
    gases
    are
    introduced.
    For
    extractive
    and dilution
    type
    monitors,
    all
    ucnitwig
    cümponents
    exposed
    to
    the
    sample gas, (e.g.,
    sample
    lines, filters,
    scrubbers,
    conditioners,
    and
    as much
    of
    the
    probe as
    practicable) are
    included
    in
    the measurement
    system.
    For in
    situ type
    monitors,
    the
    calibration
    must
    check against
    the
    injected
    gas
    for the performance
    of all
    active electronic and
    optical
    components
    (e.g.
    transmitter,
    receiver, analyzer).
    (b)
    Design
    and
    equip
    each
    pollutant concentration
    or
    CO
    2
    or
    02
    monitor to
    allow
    daily
    8

    determinations
    of
    calibration
    error
    (positive
    or
    negative)
    at
    the
    zero-
    and
    mid-or
    high-level
    concentrations
    specified
    in
    Section
    5.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    2.2.2
    Flow
    Monitors
    Design
    all
    flow
    monitors
    to
    meet
    the
    applicable
    performance
    specifications.
    2.2.2.1
    Calibration
    Error
    Test
    Design
    and
    equip
    each
    flow
    monitor
    to
    allow
    for
    a
    daily
    calibration
    error
    test
    consisting
    of
    at
    least
    two
    reference
    values:
    Zero
    to
    20
    percent
    of
    span
    or
    an
    equivalent
    reference
    value
    (e.g..
    pressure
    pulse
    or
    electronic
    signal)
    and
    50
    to
    70 percent
    of
    span.
    Flow
    monitor
    response,
    both
    before
    and
    after
    any
    adjustment,
    must
    be
    capable
    of
    being
    recorded
    by
    the
    data
    acquisition
    and
    handling
    system.
    Design
    each
    flow
    monitor
    to
    allow
    a
    daily
    calibration
    error
    test
    of
    the
    entire
    flow
    monitoring
    system,
    from
    and
    including
    the
    probe
    tip
    (or
    equivalent)
    through
    and
    including
    the
    data
    acquisition
    and
    handling
    system,
    or
    the
    flow
    monitoring
    system
    from
    and
    including
    the
    transducer
    through
    and
    including
    the
    data acquisition
    and
    handling system.
    2.2.2.2
    Interference
    Check
    (a)
    Design
    and
    equip
    each
    flow
    monitor
    with
    a
    means
    to
    ensure
    that
    the
    moisture
    expected
    to
    occur
    at
    the monitoring
    location
    does
    not
    interfere
    with
    the
    proper
    functioning
    of
    the
    flow
    monitoring
    system.
    Design
    and
    equip
    each
    flow
    monitor
    with
    a
    means
    to
    detect,
    on
    at
    least
    a
    daily
    basis,
    pluggage
    of
    each
    sample
    line and
    sensing
    port,
    and
    malfunction
    of
    each
    resistance
    temperature
    detector
    (RTD),
    transceiver
    or
    equivalent.
    (b)
    Design
    and
    equip
    each
    differential
    pressure
    flow
    monitor
    to
    provide
    an automatic,
    periodic
    back
    purging
    (simultaneously
    on
    both
    sides
    of
    the
    probe)
    or
    equivalent
    method
    of
    sufficient
    force
    and
    frequency
    to
    keep
    the
    probe
    and lines
    sufficiently
    free
    of
    obstructions
    on
    at
    least
    a
    daily
    basis
    to
    prevent
    velocity
    sensing
    interference,
    and
    a
    means
    for
    detecting
    leaks
    in
    the
    system
    on
    at
    least
    a
    quarterly
    basis
    (manual
    check
    is
    acceptable).
    (c)
    Design
    and equip
    each
    thermal
    flow
    monitor
    with
    a
    means
    to
    ensure
    on
    at
    least
    a
    daily
    basis
    that
    the
    probe remains
    sufficiently
    clean
    to
    prevent
    velocity
    sensing
    interference.
    (d)
    Design
    anu
    uip
    each
    ultrason
    ‘çw
    monitor
    with
    a
    mean.
    LO
    ensute
    ona
    least
    a
    dail
    lc
    that
    the
    transceiv.
    1
    ean
    (e.g.,
    backn’
    :
    system
    to
    prevent
    veii
    sensinc
    interference.
    2.2.3
    Mercury
    Monitors.
    Design
    and
    equip
    each
    mercury
    monitor
    to permit
    the
    introduction
    of
    known
    concentrations
    of
    elemental
    mercury
    and
    HgCl2
    separately,
    at
    a
    point
    immediately
    preceding
    the
    sample
    extraction
    9

    filtration
    system,
    suchthat
    the
    entire
    measurement
    system
    be
    checkedlf
    the mercury
    monitor
    does
    not
    have a
    converter,
    the
    HgCl2
    injection
    capability
    is
    not
    required.
    3. Performance
    Specifications
    3.1 Calibration
    Error
    (a)
    The
    calibration
    error
    performance
    specifications in this
    Section
    apply only
    to
    7-day
    calibration
    error
    tests
    under
    Sections
    6.3.1
    and
    6.3.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    and
    to the
    offline
    calibration
    demonstration
    described
    in
    Section
    2.1.1.2
    of
    Exhibit
    B to this
    Appendix.
    The calibration
    error
    limits
    for
    daily
    operation
    of the
    continuous
    monitoring
    systems
    required
    under
    this
    part are
    found
    in
    Section
    2.1.4(a)
    of Exhibit
    B
    to
    this Appendix.
    (b)
    The
    calibration
    error
    of
    a mercury
    concentration
    monitor
    must
    not deviate
    from
    the
    reference
    value
    of
    either
    the
    zero or
    upscale
    calibration
    gas
    by
    more
    than
    5.0
    percent
    of
    the span
    value,
    as
    calculated
    using
    Equation
    A-5 of
    this
    Exhibit.
    Alternatively,
    if the
    span
    value
    is 10
    ig/scrn,
    the
    calibration
    error
    test
    results
    are also
    acceptable
    if the absolute
    value
    of the
    difference
    between
    the
    monitor
    response
    value
    and
    the
    reference
    value,
    R-A
    in Equation
    A-5
    of this
    Exhibit,
    is
    <=
    1.0
    LIg/scm.
    CE
    =
    x
    100
    (Equation
    A-5)
    where,
    CE =
    Calibration
    error
    as a percentage
    of
    the
    span
    of
    the
    instrument.
    R
    =
    Reference
    value
    of
    zero
    or
    upscale
    (high-level
    or mid-level,
    as
    applicable)
    calibration
    gas
    introduced
    into
    the
    monitoring
    system.
    A
    Actual
    monitoring
    system
    response
    to the
    calibration
    gas.
    S
    Span of
    the
    instrument,
    as specified
    in
    Section
    2 of this
    Exhibit.
    3.2 Linearity
    Check
    ror
    2
    CO
    olzQ2
    monitors
    (including
    02
    :io,;
    ased
    to measure
    CO
    2
    emissions
    or
    percent
    moisture):
    La)
    The
    error
    in linearity
    for
    each calibration
    gas
    concentration
    (low-,
    mid-,
    and
    high-levels)
    must
    not
    exceed
    or
    deviate
    from the
    reference
    value
    by
    more
    than
    5.0
    percent
    as
    calculated
    using
    Equation
    A-4
    of this
    Exhibit;
    or
    10

    (b)
    The
    absolute
    value
    of
    the
    difference
    between
    the
    average
    of
    the
    monitor
    response
    values
    and
    the
    average
    of
    the
    reference
    values,
    R-A
    in
    Equation
    A-4
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    must
    be
    less
    than
    or
    equal
    to
    0.5
    percent
    CO
    or
    02,
    whichever
    is
    less
    restrictive.
    (c)
    For
    the
    linearity
    check
    and
    the
    3-level
    system
    integrity
    check
    of
    a
    mercury
    monitor,
    which
    are
    required,
    respectively,
    under
    Section
    1
    .4(c)(1
    )(B)
    and
    (c)(
    1
    )(E)
    of
    this
    Appendix,
    the
    measurement
    error
    must
    not
    exceed
    10.0
    percent
    of
    the
    reference
    value
    at
    any
    of
    the
    three
    gas
    levels.
    To
    calculate
    the
    measurement
    error
    at
    each
    level,
    take
    the
    absolute
    value
    of
    the
    difference
    between
    the
    reference
    value
    and
    mean
    CEM
    response,
    divide
    the
    result
    by
    the
    reference
    value,
    and
    then
    multiply
    by
    100.
    Alternatively,
    the results
    at
    any
    gas
    level
    are
    acceptable
    if
    the
    absolute
    value
    of
    the
    difference
    between
    the
    average
    monitor
    response
    and
    the
    average
    reference
    value,
    i.e.,
    R
    Aj
    in
    Equation
    A-4
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    does
    not
    exceed
    0.8
    Igi’m
    3
    .
    The
    principal
    and
    alternative
    performance
    specifications
    in
    this
    Section
    also
    apply
    to
    the
    single-level
    system
    integrity
    check
    described
    in
    Section
    2.6
    of
    Exhibit
    B
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    LE
    R-AI
    =
    x
    100
    (Equation
    A-4)
    where,
    LE
    =
    Percentage
    Linearity
    error,
    based
    upon
    the
    reference
    value.
    R
    =
    Reference
    value
    of
    Low-,
    mid-,
    or
    high-level
    calibration
    gas
    introduced
    into
    the
    monitoring
    system.
    A
    =
    Average
    of
    the monitoring
    system
    responses.
    3.3
    Relative
    Accuracy
    3.3.1
    Relative
    Accuracy
    for
    CO
    2
    and
    02
    Monitors
    The relative
    accuracy
    for
    C0
    and
    0
    monitors
    must
    not
    exceed
    10.0
    percent.
    The
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    results
    are
    also
    acceptable
    if
    the
    difference
    between
    -the
    mean
    value
    of
    the
    C0
    or
    02 monitor
    measurements
    and
    the
    corresponding
    reference
    method
    measurement
    mean
    value,
    calculated
    using
    equation
    A-7
    of
    this Exhibit,
    does
    not
    exceed
    +-
    1.0
    percent
    CO
    2
    or
    02,
    d
    =
    d.
    (Equation
    A-7’)
    where,
    11

    n
    = Number
    of data
    points
    d1
    =
    The difference
    between
    a referencemethod
    value
    and
    the
    corresponding
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    system
    value
    (RM—CEM)ata.given..pointintimei
    3.3.2
    Relative
    Accuracy
    for Flow
    Monitors
    (a)
    The
    relative accuracy
    of
    flow monitors
    must not
    exceed
    10.0 percent
    at any
    load
    (or
    operating)
    level
    at
    which
    a
    RATA
    is
    performed
    (i.e.,
    the low,
    mid, or
    high
    level,
    as
    defined
    in
    Section
    6.5.2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit).
    (b)
    For
    affected units
    where
    the average
    of the
    flow
    reference
    method
    measurements
    of
    gas
    velocity
    at a particular
    load
    (or
    operating)
    level
    of the
    relative
    accuracy
    test audit
    is less
    than or
    eciual
    to
    10.0
    fp
    s, the
    difference
    between
    the mean
    value of the
    flow
    monitor
    velocity
    measurements
    and
    the
    reference
    method
    mean
    value
    in
    fps
    at that level
    must not
    exceed
    +-
    2.0
    fps, wherever
    the
    10.0.
    percent
    relative accuracy
    specification
    is
    not
    achieved.
    3.3.3 Relative
    Accuracy
    for
    Moisture
    Monitoring
    Systems
    The
    relative accuracy
    of
    a moisture
    monitoring
    system
    must not
    exceed
    10.0
    percent.
    The
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    results
    are
    also acceptable
    if the
    difference
    between
    the
    mean value
    of
    the
    reference
    method measurements
    (in percent
    H
    2
    0)
    and
    the corresponding
    mean value
    of
    the
    moisture
    monitoring
    system
    measurements
    (in
    percent
    0),2
    H
    calculated
    using
    Equation
    A-7
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    does
    not exceed
    +-
    1.5
    percent
    HO.
    3.3.4 Relative
    Accuracy
    for Mercury
    Monitoring
    Systems
    The
    relative
    accuracy
    of
    a mercury
    concentration
    monitoring
    system or
    a sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system must
    not
    exceed
    20.0 percent.
    Alternatively,
    for affected
    units
    where
    the
    average
    of the
    reference
    method
    measurements
    of mercury
    concentration
    during
    the relative
    accuracy
    test
    audit
    is
    less than
    5.0
    jig/scm,
    the
    test
    results
    are acceptable
    if the difference
    between
    the
    mean
    value
    of
    the
    monitor
    measurements
    and the reference
    method
    mean value
    does
    not
    exceed
    1.0
    jig/scm,
    in
    cases
    where
    the
    relative accuracy
    specification
    of
    20.0 percent
    is
    not achieved.
    3.4 Bias
    3.4.1 Flow
    Monitors
    Flow
    monitors
    must
    not be biased
    low
    as
    determined
    by
    the
    test
    procedure
    in
    Section
    7.4
    of this
    Exhibit.
    The bias
    specification
    applies
    to all flow
    monitors
    including
    those
    measuring
    an
    average
    gas
    velocity
    of 10.0
    fps
    or less.
    12

    3.4.2
    Mercury
    Monitoring
    Systems
    Mercury
    concentration
    monitoring-systems
    and
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    systems
    must
    not
    be
    biased
    low
    as
    determined
    by
    the
    test
    procedure
    in
    Section
    7.4
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    3.5
    Cycle
    Time
    The
    cycle
    time
    for
    mercury
    concentration
    monitors,
    oxygen
    monitors
    used
    to
    determine
    percent
    moisture,
    and
    any
    other
    monitoring
    component
    of
    a continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    system
    that
    is
    required
    to
    perform
    a cycle
    time
    test
    must
    not
    exceed
    15
    minutes.
    4. Data
    Acquisition
    and
    Handling
    Systems
    Automated
    data
    acquisition
    and
    handling
    systems
    must
    read
    and
    record
    the
    full
    range
    of
    pollutant
    concentrations
    and
    volumetric
    flow
    from
    zero
    through
    span
    and
    provide
    a
    continuous,
    permanent
    record
    of
    all
    measurements
    and
    required information
    as
    an
    ASCII
    flat
    file
    capable
    of
    transmission
    both
    by
    direct
    computer-to-computer
    electronic
    transfer
    via modem
    and
    EPA-provided
    software
    and
    by
    an
    IBM-compatible
    personal
    computer
    diskette.
    These
    systems
    also
    must
    have
    the
    capability
    of
    - interpreting
    and
    converting
    the
    individual
    output
    signals
    from
    a
    flow
    monitor,
    a
    CO,
    monitor,
    an
    02
    monitor,
    a
    moisture
    monitoring
    system,
    a
    mercury
    concentration
    monitoring
    system,
    and
    a
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system,
    to
    produce
    a
    continuous
    readout
    of
    pollutant
    emission
    rates
    or
    -pollutant
    -
    mass
    emissions
    (as
    applicable)
    in
    the
    appropriate
    units
    (e.g.,
    lb/hr.
    lb/MMBtu, ounces/hr.
    tons/br).
    These
    systems
    also
    must
    have-
    -the
    capability
    of
    interpreting
    and
    converting
    the
    individual
    output
    signals
    from
    a flow
    monitor
    to produce
    a
    continuous
    readout
    of pollutant
    mass
    emission
    rates
    in the
    units
    of the
    standard.
    Where
    CO
    2
    emissions
    are
    measured
    with
    a continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    system,
    the
    data
    acquisition
    and
    handling
    system
    must
    also
    produce a readout
    of
    CO
    2
    mass
    emissions
    in tons.
    Data
    acquisition and
    handling
    systems
    must
    also
    compute
    and
    record
    monitor
    calibration
    error;
    any
    bias
    adjustments
    to
    mercury
    pollutant
    concentration
    data,
    flow
    rate
    data,
    or
    mercury
    emission
    rate
    data.
    5. Calibration
    Gas
    5.1
    Reference
    Gases
    -
    -
    -
    For
    the
    purposes
    of
    this
    Appendix,
    calibration
    gases
    include
    the
    following:
    5.1.1
    Standard
    Reference
    Materials
    (SRM)
    These
    calibration
    gases
    may
    be
    obtained
    from
    the
    National
    Institute
    of
    Standards
    and
    Technology
    (NIST)
    at the
    following
    address:
    Quince
    Orchard
    and
    Cloppers
    Road,
    Gaithersburg,
    MD
    20899-
    13

    0001
    5.1.2
    SRM-Eguivalent
    Compressed
    Gas
    Primary
    Reference
    Material
    (PRM)
    Contact
    the
    Gas
    Metrology
    Team,
    Analytical
    Chemistry
    Division,
    Chemical
    Science
    and
    Technology
    Laboratory
    of
    NIST,.at
    the
    address
    in.
    Section
    5.l.l,for
    a list
    of
    vendors
    and
    cylinder
    gases.
    5.1.3
    NIST
    Traceable
    Reference Materials
    Contact
    the
    Gas
    Metrology
    Team,
    Analytical
    Chemistry
    Division,
    Chemical
    Science
    and
    Technology
    Laboratory
    of
    NIST,
    at the
    address
    in
    Section
    5.1.1,
    for
    a list
    of
    vendors
    and
    cylinder
    gases
    that
    meet
    the
    definition
    for a
    NIST
    Traceable
    Reference
    Material
    (NTRM)
    provided
    in
    40
    CFR
    72.2,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in Section
    225.140.
    5.1.4
    EPA
    Protocol
    Gases
    (a)
    An
    EPA
    Protocol
    Gas
    is
    a
    calibration
    gas mixture
    prepared
    and
    analyzed
    according
    to
    Section
    2
    of
    the
    “EPA
    Traceability
    Protocol
    for Assay
    and
    Certification
    of
    Gaseous
    Calibration
    Standards,”
    September
    1997,
    EPA-600/R-97/121
    or
    such
    revised
    procedure
    as approved
    by
    the
    Administrator
    (EPA
    Traceability
    Protocol).
    (b)
    An EPA
    Protocol
    Gas
    must
    have
    a
    specialty
    gas
    producer-certified
    uncertainty
    (95-percent
    confidence
    interval)
    that
    must
    not
    be
    greater
    than
    2.0 percent
    of the
    certified
    concentration
    (tag
    value)
    of the
    gas
    mixture.
    The
    uncertainty
    must
    be
    calculated
    using
    the
    statistical
    procedures
    (or
    equivalent statistical
    techniques)
    that
    are
    listed
    in Section
    2.1.8
    of the
    EPA
    Traceability
    Protocol.
    (c)
    A
    copy
    of EPA-600/R-97/121
    is
    available
    from
    the
    National
    Technical
    Information
    Service,
    5285
    Port
    Royal
    Road,
    Springfield.
    VA,
    703-605-6585
    or
    http://www.ntis.gov,
    and
    from
    http://www.epa.
    gov/ttnlemc/news.html or
    http://
    www.epa.gov/appcdwww/tsb/index.html.
    5.1.5
    Research
    Gas
    Mixtures
    Research gas
    mixtures
    must
    be
    vendor-certified
    to
    be
    within
    2.0
    percent
    of
    the
    concentration
    specified
    on
    the cylinder
    label
    (tag
    value),
    using
    the
    uncertainty
    calculation
    procedure
    in
    Section
    2.1.8
    of the
    “EPA
    Traceability
    Protocol
    for
    Assay
    and
    Certification
    of
    Gaseous
    Calibration
    Standards,” September
    1997,
    EPA-600/R-97/121.
    Inquiries
    about
    the
    RGM
    program
    should
    be
    directed to: National
    Institute
    of
    Standards
    and
    Technology,
    Analytical
    Chemistry
    Division,
    Chemical Science
    and
    Technology Laboratory,
    B-324
    Chemistry,
    Gaithersburg,
    MD
    20899.
    5.1.6
    Zero
    Air
    Material
    14

    Zéroafr-rnaterialis
    ipóratedb/refeTence
    iii
    Sëctioft225.T40.
    5.1.7
    N1ST/EPA-Approved
    Certified
    Reference
    Materials
    Existing
    certified
    reference
    materials
    (CRMs) that
    are
    still
    within
    their
    certification
    period
    may
    be
    used
    as
    calibration
    gas.
    5.1.8
    Gas Manufacturer’s
    Intermediate
    Standards
    Gas
    manufacturer’s
    intermediate
    standards
    is
    defined
    in
    40
    CFR 72.2,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140.
    5.1.9
    Mercury
    Standards
    For
    7-day
    calibration
    error
    tests
    of
    mercury
    concentration
    monitors
    and
    for
    daily
    calibration
    error
    tests
    of
    mercury
    monitors,
    either
    NIST-traceable
    elemental
    mercury
    standards
    (as
    defined
    in
    Section
    225.130)
    or
    a
    NIST-traceable
    source
    of
    oxidized
    mercury
    (as
    defined
    in
    Section
    225.130)
    may
    be
    used.
    For linearity
    checks,
    NIST-traceable
    elemental
    mercury
    standards
    must
    be
    used.
    For
    3-
    level
    and single-point
    system
    integrity
    checks
    under
    Section
    1
    .4(c)(1)(E)
    of
    this
    Appendix,
    Sections
    6.2(g)
    and 6.3.1
    of
    this Exhibit,
    and
    Sections
    2.1.1,
    2.2.1
    and
    2.6
    of
    Exhibit
    B
    to
    this
    Appendix,
    a
    NIST
    traceable
    source
    of
    oxidized
    mercury
    must
    be
    used.
    Alternatively,
    other
    NIST-traceable
    standards
    may be
    used-for
    the
    required
    checks,
    subject
    to
    the
    approval
    of
    the
    Agency.
    Notwithstanding
    these
    requirements,
    mercury
    calibration
    standards
    that
    are
    not
    NIST-traceable
    may
    be
    used
    for
    the
    tests
    described
    in
    this
    Section
    until
    December
    31, 2009.
    However,
    on
    and
    after
    January
    1,
    2010,
    only
    NIST-traceable
    calibration
    standards
    must
    be
    used
    for
    these
    tests.
    5.2
    Concentrations
    Four
    concentration
    levels
    are
    required
    as
    follows.
    5.2.1
    Zero-level
    Concentration
    0.0
    to
    20.0
    percent
    of
    span,
    including
    span
    for
    high-scale
    or
    both
    low-
    and
    high-scale
    for
    CO,
    and
    02
    monitors,
    as
    appropriate.
    5.2.2
    Low-level
    Concentration
    20.0 to
    30.0 percent
    of
    span, including
    span
    for
    high-scale
    or
    both-low--
    and high-scale
    for
    CQ
    2
    and
    Q
    monitors,
    as
    appropriate.
    5.2.3
    Mid-level
    Concentration
    50.0 to
    60.0
    percent
    of
    span,
    including span
    for
    high-scale
    or
    both
    low-
    and
    high-scale
    for
    CO
    2
    and
    15

    Q2
    monitors,:
    asappropri’ate
    5.2.4High-level
    Concentration
    80.0 to
    100.0
    percent
    of span,
    including
    span
    for
    high-scale
    orboth
    low-and
    high-scale
    for
    CO
    2
    and
    Q2
    monitors,
    as
    appropriate.
    6.
    Certification
    Tests
    and
    Procedures
    6.1 General
    Requirements
    6.1.1
    Pretest
    Preparation
    Install
    the
    components
    of the
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    system
    (i.e.,
    pollutant
    concentration
    monitors,
    CO,
    or
    02
    monitor,
    and
    flow
    monitor)
    as specified
    in Sections
    1, 2, and
    3
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    and
    prepare
    each
    system
    component
    and
    the combined
    system
    for
    operation
    in
    accordance
    with
    the
    manufacturer’s
    written
    instructions.
    Operate
    the
    unit(s)
    during
    each
    period
    when
    measurements
    are
    made.
    Units
    may
    be tested
    on
    non-consecutive days.
    To
    the extent
    practicable,
    test
    the
    DABS
    software
    prior
    to
    testing
    the
    monitoring
    hardware.
    6.1.2
    Requirements
    for
    Air
    Emission
    Testing
    Bodies
    (a)
    On and
    after
    January
    1, 2009,
    any
    Air Emission
    Testing
    Body
    (AETB)
    conducting
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audits
    of
    CEMS
    and
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    systems
    under
    Part
    225,
    Subpart
    B,
    must
    conform
    to the
    requirements
    of
    ASTM
    D7036-04
    (incorporated
    by
    reference
    under
    Section
    225.140).
    This
    Section
    is
    not
    applicable
    to
    daily
    operation,
    daily
    calibration
    error
    checks,
    daily
    flow
    interference
    checks,
    quarterly
    linearity
    checks
    or
    routine
    maintenance
    of CEMS.
    (b’)
    The AETB
    must
    provide
    to
    the affected
    source(s)
    certification
    that the
    AETB
    operates
    in
    conformance
    with,
    and
    that
    data
    submitted
    to the
    Agency
    has
    been
    collected
    in accordance
    with,
    the
    requirements
    of
    ASTM
    D7036-04
    (incorporated
    by
    reference
    under
    Section:225.i4O).
    This
    certification
    may
    be
    provided
    in
    the
    form
    of:
    (1)
    A
    certificate
    of
    accreditation
    of relevant
    scope
    issued
    by
    a recognized,
    national
    accreditation
    body:
    or
    (2)
    A
    letter
    of
    certification
    signed
    by
    a
    member
    of
    the senior
    management
    staff
    of the AETB.
    (c)
    The AETB
    must
    either
    provide
    a
    Qualified
    Individual
    on-site
    to
    conduct
    or
    must
    oversee
    all
    relative
    accuracy
    testing
    carried
    out
    by
    the AETB
    as
    required
    in ASTM
    D7036-04
    (incorporated
    by
    reference
    under
    Section
    225.140).
    The
    Qualified
    Individual
    must provide
    the affected
    source(s)
    with
    copies
    of the
    qualification credentials
    relevant
    to the
    scope
    of the
    testing
    conducted.
    16

    6.2
    Li±
    Check
    the
    linearity
    of
    each
    CO,.
    Hg,
    and
    02
    monitor
    while
    the
    unit,
    or
    group
    of
    units
    for
    a
    common
    stack,
    is
    combustingfuel.
    atconditions
    of
    typical
    stack
    temperature
    and
    pressure;
    it
    is
    not
    necessary
    for
    the
    unit
    to
    be
    generating
    electricity
    during
    this
    test.
    For
    units
    with
    two
    measurement
    ranges
    (high
    and
    low)
    for
    a
    particular
    parameter,
    perform
    a
    linearity check
    on
    both
    the
    low
    scale
    and
    the
    high
    scale.
    For
    on-going
    quality
    assurance
    of
    the
    CEMS,
    perform
    linearity
    checks,
    using
    the
    procedures
    in
    this
    Section,
    on
    the
    range(s)
    and
    at
    the
    frequency
    specified in
    Section
    2.2.1
    of
    Exhibit
    B
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    Challenge
    each
    monitor
    with
    calibration
    gas,
    as
    defined
    in
    Section
    5.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    at
    the
    lowmid-,
    and high-range
    concentrations
    specified
    in
    Section
    5.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    Introduce
    the
    calibration
    gas
    at
    the gas
    injection
    port,
    as
    specified
    in
    Section
    2.2.1
    of
    this Exhibit.
    Operate
    each
    monitor
    at
    its
    normal
    operating
    temperature
    and
    conditions.
    For
    extractive
    and
    dilution
    type
    monitors,
    pass
    the calibration
    gas
    through
    all
    filters,
    scrubbers,
    conditioners,
    and
    other
    monitor
    components
    used
    during
    normal
    sampling
    and
    through
    as
    much
    of
    the
    sampling
    probe
    as
    is
    practical.
    For
    in-situ
    type
    monitors,
    perform
    calibration
    checking
    all
    active
    electronic
    and
    optical
    components..
    including
    the
    transmitter,
    receiver,
    and
    analyzer.
    Challenge
    the
    monitor
    three
    times
    with
    each
    reference
    gas
    (see
    example
    data
    sheet
    in
    Figure
    1).
    Do
    not
    use
    the
    same
    gas
    twice
    in
    succession.
    To
    the
    extent
    practicable,
    the
    duration
    of
    each
    linearity
    test,
    from
    the
    hour
    of
    the
    first
    injection
    to
    the
    hour
    of
    the last
    injection,
    must
    not
    exceed
    24
    unit
    operating
    hours.
    Record
    the
    monitor
    response
    from
    the
    data acquisition
    and
    handling
    system.
    For
    each
    concentration,
    use
    the
    average
    of
    the
    responses
    to
    determine
    the
    error
    in
    linearity
    using Equation
    A-4
    in
    this
    Exhibit.
    Linearity
    checks
    are
    acceptable
    for
    monitor
    or
    monitoring
    system
    certification,
    recertification,
    or
    quality
    assurance
    if
    none
    of
    the
    test
    results
    exceed
    the
    applicable
    perfonnance
    specifications
    in
    Section
    3.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    The
    status
    of
    emission
    data
    from
    a
    CEMS
    prior
    to
    and
    during
    a
    linearity
    test
    period
    must
    be
    determined
    as
    follows:
    (a)
    For
    the initial
    certification
    of
    a
    CEMS,
    data
    from the
    monitoring
    system
    are
    considered
    invalid
    until
    all certification
    tests,
    including
    the
    linearity
    test,
    have
    been
    successfully
    completed,
    unless
    the
    conditional
    data validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3) of
    this
    Appendix
    are
    used.
    When
    the
    procedures
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)
    of
    this
    Appendix
    are
    followed,
    the
    words
    “initial
    certification”
    apply
    instead
    of
    “recertification,”
    and
    complete
    all
    of
    the
    initial
    certification
    tests
    by
    January
    1,
    2009,
    rather
    than
    within
    the
    time
    periods
    specified
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)(D)
    of
    this
    Appendix
    for
    the
    individual
    tests.
    (b)
    For
    tue
    ruuL
    assurance
    linearity
    checks
    required
    by
    Section
    2.2.1
    of
    Exhibit
    B
    to
    this
    Appendix,
    use
    the
    data validation
    proc:
    cection
    2.2.3
    of
    Exhibit
    B
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    (c)
    When
    a
    linearity
    test
    is
    required
    as
    a
    diagnostic
    test
    or
    for
    recertification,
    use
    the
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    1.4
    (b)(3)
    of
    this
    Appendix.
    (d)
    For linearity
    tests of
    non-redundant
    backup
    monitoring
    systems,
    use
    the
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(d)(2)(C)
    of
    this
    Appendix.
    17

    (e)
    theexpiratiorrofagraceperkod
    use
    the
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in Sections 2.2.3
    and 2.2.4,
    respectively, of
    Exhibit
    B
    to this
    Appendix.
    (f)
    For all other
    linearity
    checks, use
    the data validation
    procedures
    in Section 2.2.3
    of Exhibit
    B to
    this Appendix.
    (g)
    For
    mercury monitors,
    follow the
    guidelines in Section
    2.2.3 of
    this
    Exhibit
    in
    addition
    to
    the
    applicable
    procedures
    in Section 6.2 when
    performing
    the system
    integrity
    checks
    described
    in
    Section
    1.4(c)(1)(E)
    and in
    Sections 2.1.1,
    2.2.1, and 2.6
    of Exhibit B to this
    Appendix.
    (h)
    For
    mercury concentration
    monitors,
    if moisture
    is added to the
    calibration
    gas
    during
    the
    recuired
    linearity
    checks
    or system integrity
    checks,
    the
    moisture content
    of the calibration
    gas
    must
    be accounted
    for. Under these
    circumstances,
    the dry basis
    concentration
    of the calibration
    gas
    must
    be
    used to
    calculate the linearity
    error
    or measurement
    error
    (as applicable).
    6.3 7-Day
    Calibration
    Error
    Test
    6.3.1 Gas
    Monitor 7-day Calibration
    Error Test
    Measure the
    calibration error of each
    mercury
    concentration monitor,
    and
    each
    CO
    2 or
    0,
    monitor
    while the
    unit is combusting
    fuel
    (but
    not
    necessarily
    generating
    electricity)
    once each
    day
    for
    7
    consecutive
    operating
    days
    according to the
    following procedures.
    For mercury
    monitors,
    you
    may
    perform this test using
    either elemental mercury
    standards
    or a NIST-traceable
    source
    of
    oxidized
    mercury.
    Also
    for
    mercury
    monitors, if
    moisture is
    added to the calibration
    gas,
    the added
    moisture
    must be
    accounted for
    and the
    dry-basis
    concentration
    of the calibration
    gas
    must
    be
    .used
    to
    calculate
    the
    calibration
    error.
    (In
    the
    event
    that unit
    outages occur
    after the
    commencement
    of
    the
    test,
    the
    7
    consecutive
    unit
    operating
    days need
    not
    be 7 consecutive calendar
    days.)
    Units
    using
    dual
    span monitors
    must
    perform
    the
    calibration error
    test
    on both high-
    and low-scales
    of
    the
    pollutant
    concentration
    monitor.
    The calibration
    error test
    procedures
    in
    this
    Section and
    in
    Section
    6.3.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    must also be used
    to perform the
    daily assessments and
    additional
    calibration
    error
    tests
    required
    under
    Sections 2.1.1
    and
    2.1.3
    of Exhibit
    B
    to
    this
    Appendix. Do not
    make
    manual
    or
    automatic
    adjustments to the monitor
    settings
    until after taking measurements
    at both
    zero
    and
    high
    concentration
    levels
    for that
    day during the
    7-day
    test. If automatic
    adjustments
    are
    made
    following
    both
    injections,
    conduct the
    calibration error
    test such
    that
    the magnitude of
    the
    adjustments
    can
    be
    determined and
    recorded.
    Record and
    report test results
    for cach
    day
    using
    the
    unadjusted
    concentration
    measured
    in
    the calibration
    error
    test prior to making
    any manual
    or
    automatic
    adjustments
    (i.e.,
    resetting the
    calibration). The calibration
    error
    tests should
    be approximately
    24
    hours
    apart,
    (unless
    the
    7-
    day
    test
    is performed
    over
    non-consecutive
    days).
    Perform
    calibration
    error tests at
    both the zero-level
    concentration
    and high-level
    concentration,
    as specified
    in
    Section
    5.2
    of this
    Exhibit. Alternatively,
    a
    mid-level
    concentration
    gas
    (50.0
    to
    60.0
    percent
    of
    the
    span
    value)
    may be used
    in
    lieu of the high-level
    gas,
    provided
    that
    the mid-level
    gas
    is
    more
    representative
    of the actual
    stack gas concentrations.
    Use only
    calibration
    gas, as specified
    in
    Section
    18

    5.1
    of
    this
    Ehib’iL
    Jñtroducethe’
    calibration
    gas
    at
    the’gasiniection
    port,’
    as
    specffiediriSecón22J
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    Operate
    each
    monitor
    in
    its
    normal
    sampling
    mode.
    For
    extractive
    and
    dilution
    type
    monitors,
    pass
    the
    calibration
    gas
    through
    all
    filters,
    scrubbërs,
    conditioners,
    and•
    other
    monitor
    components
    used
    during
    normal
    sampling
    and
    through
    as:much.
    of
    the
    sampling
    probe
    as
    is
    practical.
    For
    in-situ
    type
    monitors,
    perform
    calibration,
    checking
    all
    active
    electronic
    and
    optical
    components,
    including
    the transmitter,
    receiver,
    and
    analyzer.
    Challenge
    thern
    pollutant
    concentration
    monitors
    and
    cQ
    or
    02
    monitors
    once
    with
    each
    calibration
    gas. Record
    the
    monitor
    response
    from
    the
    data
    acquisition
    and handling
    system.
    Using
    Equation
    A-5
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    determine
    the
    calibration
    error
    at
    each
    concentration
    once
    each
    day
    (at
    approximately
    24-hour
    intervals)
    for
    7
    consecutive
    days
    according
    to
    the procedures
    given
    in
    this
    Section.
    The
    results
    of
    a
    7-day
    calibration
    error
    test
    are
    acceptable
    for monitor
    or
    monitoring
    system
    certification,
    recertification
    or
    diagnostic
    testing
    if
    none
    of
    these
    daily
    calibration
    error
    test
    results
    exceed
    the
    applicable
    performance
    specifications
    in
    Section
    3.1
    of
    this Exhibit.
    The
    status
    of
    emission
    data
    from
    a
    gas
    monitor
    prior
    to
    and
    during
    a
    7-
    day
    calibration
    error
    test
    period
    must
    be
    determined
    as
    follows:
    (a)
    For
    initial
    certification,
    data
    from
    the
    monitor
    are
    considered
    invalid
    until
    all
    certification
    tests.
    including
    the
    7-day
    calibration
    error
    test,
    have
    been
    successfully
    completed,
    unless
    the
    conditional
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)
    of
    this
    Appendix
    are
    used.
    When
    the
    procedures
    in
    Section
    1.4(b)(3)
    of
    this
    Appendix
    are
    followed,
    the
    words
    “initial
    certification”
    apply
    instead
    of
    “recertification,”
    and complete
    all
    of
    the
    initial
    certification
    tests
    by
    January
    1,
    2009,
    rather
    than
    within
    the
    time
    periods
    specified
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)(D)
    of
    this
    Appendix
    for
    the
    individual
    tests.
    (b)
    When
    a
    7-day
    calibration
    error
    test
    is
    required
    as
    a
    diagnostic
    test
    or
    for
    recertification,
    use
    the
    data validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)
    of
    this
    Appendix.
    6.3.2
    Flow
    Monitor
    7-day
    Calibration
    Error
    Test
    Flow
    monitnr
    installed
    on
    peaking
    units
    (as
    defined
    in
    40
    CFR
    72.2,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225
    140)
    are
    excivpteu
    1Iou
    1
    ay
    calibration
    error
    test
    requirements
    of
    this
    part
    In
    all
    other
    cases,
    perform
    the
    7-day
    calibration
    erir
    test
    of
    a
    flow
    monitor,
    when
    required
    for
    certification,
    recertification
    or
    diagnostic
    testing,
    according
    io
    :e
    foHowing
    procedures.
    Introduce
    the reference
    signal
    corresponding
    to
    the
    values
    specified
    in
    Section
    2.2.2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    to
    the
    probe
    tip
    (or
    equivalent),
    or
    to
    the
    transducer.
    During
    the
    7-day
    certification
    test
    period,
    conduct
    the
    calibration
    error
    test
    while
    the
    unit
    is
    operating
    once
    each
    unit
    operating
    day
    (as
    close
    to
    24-hour
    intervals
    as
    practicable).
    In
    the
    event
    that
    unit outages
    occur
    after
    the
    commencement
    of
    the
    test,
    the
    7
    consecutive
    operating
    days
    need
    not
    be 7
    consecutive
    calendar
    days.
    Record
    the
    flow
    monitor
    responses
    by
    means
    of
    the
    data
    acquisition
    and
    handling
    system.
    Calculate
    the
    calibration
    error
    using
    Equation
    A-6
    of
    this Exhibit.
    Do
    not
    perform
    any
    corrective
    maintenance,
    repair,
    or
    replacement
    upon
    the
    flow
    monitor
    during
    the
    7-day
    test
    period
    other
    than
    that
    required
    in
    the
    quality
    assurance/quality
    control
    plan
    required
    by
    Exhibit
    B
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    Do
    not
    make
    adjustments
    between
    the
    zero
    and
    high
    reference
    level
    measurements
    on
    any
    day
    during
    the
    7-day
    test.
    If
    the
    flow
    monitor
    operates
    within
    the
    calibration
    error
    performance
    specification
    (i.e.,
    less
    than
    or
    equal
    to
    3.0
    percent
    error
    each
    day
    and
    requiring
    no
    corrective
    maintenance,
    repair,
    or
    replacement
    during
    the
    7-
    19

    day
    testperiod),
    alLmaintenance•aetivjtiés
    and
    the magnitude
    of any
    adjustments.
    Record
    output
    readings
    from the
    data
    acquisition
    and
    handling
    system
    bef6re
    and
    after
    all
    adjustments.
    Record
    and
    report
    all
    calibration
    error test
    results
    using
    the
    unadjusted
    flow
    rate
    measured
    in the calibration
    error test
    prior
    to resetting
    the
    calibration.
    Record
    all adjustments
    made
    during
    the
    7-day period
    at the time
    the
    adjustment
    is made,
    and
    report
    them
    in the certification
    or recertification
    ap.plication
    The. status
    of emissions
    data
    from
    a flow
    monitor
    prior
    to and
    during
    a 7-day
    calibration
    error test
    period
    must be
    determined
    as
    follows:
    (a)
    For
    initial
    certification,
    data
    from
    the
    monitor
    are considered
    invalid
    until
    all
    certification
    tests,
    including
    the
    7-day
    calibration
    error test,
    have been
    successfully
    completed,
    unless
    the
    conditional
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    l.4(b)(3)
    ofthis
    Appendix
    are
    used.
    When
    the
    procedures
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)
    of
    this Appendix
    are followed,
    the
    words
    ?initial
    certification’
    apply
    instead
    of
    “recertification,”
    and
    complete
    all of the
    initial
    certification
    tests
    by
    January 1,
    2009,
    rather
    than
    within the
    time
    periods
    specified
    in Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)(D)
    of
    this Appendix
    for
    the
    individual
    tests.
    (b) When
    a 7-day
    calibration
    error
    test is
    required as
    a diagnostic
    test or
    for
    recertification,
    use the
    data validation
    procedures
    in Section
    1
    .4(b)(3).
    CE
    =
    x
    100
    (Equation
    A-6)
    S
    where:
    CE
    = Calibration
    error
    as a
    percentage
    of span.
    R =
    Low or
    high level
    reference
    value
    specified
    in
    Section
    2.2.2.1
    of
    this Exhibit.
    A = Actual
    flow
    monitor
    response
    to
    the reference
    value.
    S
    = Flow
    monitor
    calibration
    span
    value
    as
    determined
    under
    Section
    2.1.2.2 of this
    Exhibit.
    6.3.3
    For
    gas
    or
    flow
    monitors
    installed
    on peaking
    units,
    the
    exemption
    from performing
    the
    7-day
    calibration
    error test
    applies
    as long as
    the unit continues
    to meet the
    definition
    of
    a
    peaking
    unit
    in
    40
    CFR
    72.2, incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140.
    However,
    if at
    the end
    of a
    particular
    calendar
    year
    or ozone season,
    it is
    determined
    that
    peaking
    unit
    status has
    been lost,
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    must
    perform
    a diagnostic
    7-day calibration
    error test
    of each monitor
    installed
    on
    the
    unit,
    by
    no
    later
    than December
    31 of
    the
    following
    calendar
    year.
    6.4 Cycle
    Time
    Test
    20

    Perform
    cycle
    time
    tests
    for
    each
    pollutant
    concentration
    monitor
    and
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    system
    while
    the
    unit
    is
    operating,
    according
    to
    the
    following
    procedures.
    Use
    a zero-
    level
    and
    a
    high-level
    calibration
    gas’
    (asdefined.
    in.
    Section
    5.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit)
    alternately.
    For
    mercury
    monitors,
    the
    calibration
    gas
    used
    for
    this
    test
    may
    either
    be
    the elemental
    or
    oxidized
    form
    of mercury.
    To
    determine
    the
    downscale
    cycle
    time,
    measure
    the
    concentration
    of
    the
    flue
    gas
    emissions
    until
    the
    response
    stabilizes.
    Record
    the
    stable
    emissions
    value.
    Inject
    a
    zero-level
    concentration
    calibration
    gas
    into
    the
    probe
    tip
    (or
    injection
    port
    leading
    to
    the
    calibration
    cell,
    for
    in
    situ
    systems
    with
    no
    probe).
    Record
    the
    time
    of
    the
    zero
    gas
    injection,
    using
    the
    data
    acquisition
    and
    handling
    system
    (DAHS).
    Next,
    allow
    the monitor
    to
    measure
    the
    concentration
    of the
    zero
    gas
    until
    the
    response
    stabilizes.
    Record
    the
    stable
    ending
    calibration’
    gas
    reading.
    Determine
    the
    downscale
    cycle
    time
    as the
    time
    it
    takes
    for
    95.0
    percent
    of the
    step
    change
    to
    be
    achieved
    between
    the
    stable
    stack
    emissions
    value
    and
    the
    stable
    ending
    zero
    gas
    reading.
    Then
    repeat
    the
    procedure,
    starting
    with
    stable stack
    emissions
    and
    injecting
    the
    high-level
    gas,
    to
    determine
    the
    upscale
    cycle
    time.
    which
    is
    the
    time
    it
    takes
    for
    95.0
    percent
    of
    the
    step
    change
    to
    be
    achieved
    between
    the
    stable
    stack
    emissions
    value
    and
    the
    stable
    ending
    high-level
    gas
    reading.
    Use the
    following
    criteria
    to
    assess
    when
    a
    stable
    reading
    of
    stack
    emissions
    or
    calibration
    gas
    concentration
    has
    been
    attained.
    A
    stable
    value
    is equivalent
    to
    a reading
    with
    a
    change
    of
    less
    than
    2.0
    percent
    of
    the
    span
    value’
    for
    2
    minutes,
    or
    a
    reading
    with
    a change
    of
    less
    than
    6.0
    percent
    from
    the
    measured
    average
    concentration
    over
    6 minutes.
    Alternatively,
    the
    reading
    is considered
    stable
    if it
    changes
    by
    no
    more
    than
    0.5
    ppm,
    0.5
    g/m
    3
    (for
    mercury) for
    two
    minutes.
    (Owners
    or
    operators
    of systems
    which
    do
    not
    record
    data
    in
    1-minute
    or
    3-minute
    intervals
    may.
    petition
    the
    Agency
    for
    alternative
    stabilization
    criteria). For
    monitors
    or
    monitoring
    systems that
    perform
    a
    series
    of
    operations
    (such
    as purge, sample,
    and
    analyze),
    time
    .the injections
    of
    the
    calibration
    gases
    so
    they
    will
    produce
    the
    longest
    possible
    cycle
    time.
    Refer
    to
    Figures
    6a
    and
    6b
    in
    this
    Exhibit
    for
    example
    calculations
    of
    upscale
    and
    downscale
    cycle
    times.
    Report
    the
    slower
    of
    the
    two
    cycle
    times
    (upscale
    or
    downscale)
    as
    the
    cycle
    time
    for
    the
    analyzer.
    On
    and
    after
    January
    1,
    2009,
    record
    the
    cycle
    time
    for
    each
    component
    analyzer
    separately.
    For
    time-shared
    systems,
    perform
    the
    cycle
    time
    tests
    at
    each
    probe
    locations
    that
    will
    be
    polled
    within
    the
    same
    15-minute
    period
    during
    monitoring
    system
    operations.
    To
    determine
    the
    cycle
    time
    for
    time-shared
    systems,
    at
    each
    monitoring
    location,
    report
    the
    sum
    of
    the
    cycle
    time
    observed
    at that
    monitoring
    location
    plus
    the
    sum
    of
    the
    time
    required
    for
    all
    purge
    cycles
    (as
    determined
    by the
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    system
    manufacturer)
    at
    each
    of
    the
    probe
    locations
    of
    the
    time-shared
    systems.
    For
    monitors
    with
    dual
    ranges,
    report
    the
    test
    results
    for
    each
    range
    separately.
    Cycle
    time
    test
    results
    are
    acceptable
    for
    monitor
    or
    monitoring
    system
    certification,
    recertification
    or
    diagnostic
    testing
    if
    none
    of
    the
    cycle
    times
    exceed
    15
    minutes.
    The
    status
    of
    emissions
    data
    from
    a
    monitor
    prior
    to
    and
    during
    a
    cycle
    time
    test
    period
    must
    be
    determined
    as
    follows:
    (a)
    For
    initial
    certification,
    data
    from
    the
    monitor
    are
    considered
    invalid
    until
    all
    certification
    tests,
    including
    the
    cycle
    time
    test,
    have
    been
    successfully
    completed,
    unless
    the
    conditional
    data
    validation procedures
    in Section
    1
    .4(b)(3) of
    this
    Appendix
    are
    used.
    When
    the
    procedures
    in
    Section
    1 .4(b)(3) of this
    Appendix
    are
    followed,
    the
    words
    “initial
    .certification”
    apply
    instead
    of
    “recertification,”
    and
    complete
    all of
    the
    initial
    certification
    tests
    by
    January
    1,
    2009,
    rather
    than
    21

    within’the’tinie
    periods’speci’ffedin Section
    .4(b4E•3)(DYofthisAppendix’fortheindividüai.
    tests.
    (b)
    When a cycle time test is required as a diagnostic test or
    for rcertificatiön,
    use the
    data
    validation
    procedures in Section
    1
    .4(b)(3.)
    of this Appendix.
    6.5 Relative Accuracy and
    Bias Tests
    (General Procedures)
    Perform
    the required relative accuracy test
    audits
    (RATAs)
    as follows for each flow
    monitor,
    each
    Q2
    or CO
    2 diluent monitor used to calculate heat input, each
    mercury concentration
    monitoring
    system, each sorbent
    trap
    monitoring system,
    and each moisture monitoring system:
    (a) Except as
    otherwise provided
    in
    this paragraph,
    perform
    each RATA while the
    unit
    (or
    units,
    if
    more than one unit exhausts into the flue) is combusting the fuel that
    is a normal primary
    or
    backup
    fuel for that unit
    (for
    some
    units, more than one type
    of fuel may be considered normal,
    e.g.,
    a
    unit
    that combusts
    gas or oil on
    a seasonal
    basis).
    For units that co-fire fuels
    as
    the
    predominant
    mode
    of
    operation, perform the RATAs while co-firing. For mercury
    monitoring
    systems,
    perform the
    RATAs while the unit is combusting coal. When relative accuracy test audits are
    performed
    on
    CEMS
    installed on
    bypass
    stacks/ducts,
    use
    the
    fuel
    normally combusted
    by
    the
    unit (or
    units,
    if
    more
    than one unit exhausts into the
    flue)
    when emissions
    exhaust through the bypass
    stack/ducts.
    (b)
    Perform each RATA at the load
    (or
    operating)
    level(s)
    specified
    in Section 6.5.1 or
    6.5.2
    of this
    Exhibit or in Section 2.3.1.3 of Exhibit B to this Appendix, as applicable.
    (c)
    For monitoring
    systems with
    dual ranges,
    perform
    the relative
    accuracy
    test on
    the
    range
    normally used
    for measuring emissions. For
    units with add-on mercury
    controls
    that
    operate
    continuously
    rather than
    seasonally,
    or for units
    that
    need a dual, range to record high
    concentration
    “spikes”
    during startup conditions, the low range is considered
    normal. However, for
    some
    dual
    span
    units
    (e.g., for units that use
    fuel
    switching or for which
    the emission controls
    are
    operated
    seasonally),
    provided
    that
    both monitor ranges
    are connected
    to
    a common
    probe
    and
    sample
    interface,
    either
    of the two measurement ranges may
    be considered normal; in such
    cases,
    perform
    the
    RATA on the range that is in use at the time of the
    scheduled test. If the low
    and
    high
    measurement
    ranges are connected to separate sample
    probes
    and interfaces, RATA
    testing
    on
    both
    ranges is
    required.
    (d)
    Record monitor or monitoring
    system output
    from the data acquisition and
    handling
    system.
    (e)
    Complete
    each single-load relative accuracy test
    audit within
    a
    period
    of 168
    consecutive
    unit
    operating
    hours, as
    defined
    in
    40 CFR 72.2, incorporated
    by reference in
    Section 225. 140
    (or,
    for
    CEMS
    installed on
    common stacks or bypass
    stacks, 168 consecutive stack
    operating
    hours,
    as
    defined
    in 40 CFR
    72.2, incorporated
    by
    reference
    in Section
    225.140). Notwithstanding
    this
    requirement, up to
    336 consecutive unit or stack
    operating hours
    may be taken to
    complete
    the
    RATA of a
    mercury monitoring
    system,
    when ASTM 6784-02
    (incorporated
    by
    reference
    under
    Section
    225.140)
    or
    Method
    29
    in appendix A-8 to
    40 CFR 60, incorporated
    by reference
    in
    Section
    22

    225
    l40isused
    asth&
    referet
    cenetho
    For-2-1eve}and34eveiflow
    moniforRATAs,
    comD}ete
    afi
    of
    the
    RATAs
    at
    all
    levels,
    to
    the
    extent
    practicable,
    within
    a
    period
    of
    168
    consecutive
    unit
    (or
    stack)
    operating
    hours
    however,
    if
    this
    is
    not
    possible,
    up
    to
    720 consecutive
    unit
    (or
    stack)
    operating
    hoursmay.be
    taken4o:comp1etearnu1tip1e-load
    flow
    RATA..
    (f)
    The status
    of
    emission
    data
    from
    the
    CEMS
    prior,
    to
    and
    during
    the
    RATA
    test
    period
    must
    be
    determined
    as
    follows:
    (1)
    For
    the
    initial
    certification
    of
    a
    CEMS,
    data
    from the
    monitoring
    system
    are
    considered
    invalid
    until
    all certification
    tests,
    including
    the
    RATA,
    have
    been
    successfully
    completed,
    unless
    the
    conditional
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)
    of
    this
    Appendix
    are
    used.
    When
    the
    procedures
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)
    of
    this
    Appendix
    are
    followed,
    the
    words
    “initial
    certification”
    apply
    instead
    of
    “recertification,”
    and
    complete
    all
    of
    the
    initial
    certification
    tests
    by
    January
    1,
    2009,
    rather
    than
    within
    the
    time periods
    specified
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)(D)
    of
    this
    Appendix
    for
    the
    individual
    tests.
    (2)
    For the
    routine
    quality
    assurance
    RATAs
    required
    by
    Section
    2.3.1
    of
    Exhibit
    B
    to
    this
    Appendix,
    use
    the
    data validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    2.3.2
    of
    Exhibit
    B
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    (3)
    For
    recertification
    RATAs,
    use
    the
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3).
    (4)
    For quality
    assurance
    RATAs
    of
    non-redundant
    backup
    monitoring
    systems,
    use
    the
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in
    Sections
    1.4(d)(2)(D)
    and
    (E)
    of
    this
    Appendix.
    (5)
    For RATAs
    performed
    during
    and
    after
    the
    expiration
    of
    a
    grace
    period,
    use
    the
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in
    Sections
    2.3.2
    and
    2.3.3,
    respectively,
    of
    Exhibit
    B
    to
    this.
    Appendix.
    (6)
    For all
    other
    RATAs,
    use
    the
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    2.3.2
    of
    Exhibit
    B
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    (g)
    For
    each
    flow monitor,
    each
    CQ2
    or
    02
    diluent
    monitor
    used
    to
    determine
    heat
    input,
    each
    moisture
    monitoring
    system,
    each
    mercury
    concentration
    monitoring
    system,
    and
    each
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system,
    calculate
    the
    relative
    accuracy,
    in
    accordance
    with
    Section
    7.3
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    as
    applicable.
    6.5.1
    Gas and
    Mercury
    Monitoring
    System
    RATAs
    (Special
    Considerations)
    (a)
    Perform
    the
    required
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audits
    for
    each
    CO
    2
    or
    0, diluent
    monitor
    used
    to
    determine heat
    input, each
    mercury
    concentration
    monitoring
    system,
    and
    each
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system
    at
    the normal
    load
    level
    or
    normal
    operating
    level
    for
    the
    unit
    (or
    combined
    units,
    if
    common
    stack),
    as
    defined
    in
    Section
    6.5.2.1
    of
    this Exhibit.
    If
    two load
    levels
    or
    operating
    levels
    have
    been
    designated
    as
    normal,
    the
    RATAs
    may
    be
    done
    at
    either
    load
    level.
    23

    (b)
    For
    the initialcertiflthtionfa
    :gasor meru.ry”nioni.tring..system:.•and
    :
    forrectjflóations
    in,,
    which,
    in
    addition to
    a RATA,
    one
    or more
    other
    tests
    are required
    (i.e.,
    a
    linearity
    test,
    cycle
    time
    test, or
    7-day
    calibration
    error
    test), the
    Agency recommends
    that
    the RATA
    not
    be
    commenced
    until
    the
    other
    required
    tests.of
    the:
    CEMShave
    been.
    passed
    6.5.2
    Flow
    Monitor RATAs;(Special
    Considerations)
    (a) Except
    as
    otherwise
    provided
    in paragraph
    (b)
    or
    (e)
    of
    this Section,
    perform
    relative
    accuracy
    test audits
    for the
    initial
    certification
    of each
    flow
    monitor
    at three
    different
    exhaust
    gas
    velocities
    (low,
    mid,
    and
    high),
    corresponding
    to three
    different
    load levels
    or
    operating
    levels
    within
    the
    range
    of operation,
    as
    de±ine&
    iii
    Section
    6.5.2.1 of
    this’ Exhibit
    For a
    common
    stack/duct,
    the
    three
    different
    exhaust
    gas
    velocities
    may
    be
    obtained
    from
    frequently
    used
    unit/load
    or
    operating
    level
    combinations
    for
    the
    units exhausting
    to the
    common
    stack.
    Select the
    three
    exhaust
    gas
    velocities
    such
    that
    the audit
    points at
    adjacent
    load
    or
    operating
    levels
    (i.e.,
    low
    and
    mid or
    mid and
    high),
    in
    megawatts
    (or
    in
    thousands
    of
    lb/hr
    of
    steam
    production
    or in fl/sec.
    as
    applicable),
    are
    separated
    by
    no less
    than 25.0 percent
    of the
    range of
    operation,
    as defined
    in Section
    6.5.2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    (b)
    For flow
    monitors
    on bypass
    stacks/ducts
    and
    peaking units,
    the flow
    monitor
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audits
    for
    initial
    certification
    and
    recertification
    must
    be single-load
    tests,
    performed
    at the
    normal
    load, as
    defined in
    Section
    6.5.2.1(d)
    of
    this Exhibit.
    (c)
    Flow
    monitor
    recertification
    RATAs
    must
    be done
    at
    three load
    level(s)
    (or
    three
    operating
    levels),
    unless
    otherwise
    specified
    in
    paragraph
    (b)
    or
    (e)
    of
    this
    Section
    or
    unless
    otherwise
    specified
    or approved
    by
    the
    Agency.
    (d)
    The semiannual
    and annual
    quality
    assurance
    flow monitor
    RATAs
    required
    under
    Exhibit
    B to
    this Appendix
    must be done
    at the
    load level(s)
    (or
    operating
    levels)
    specified
    in Section
    2.3.1.3
    of
    Exhibit
    B to
    this
    Appendix.
    (e)
    For
    flow
    monitors
    installed on
    units that
    do
    not
    produce
    electrical
    or thermal
    output,
    the
    flow
    RATAs
    for
    initial certification
    or
    recertification
    may
    be done
    at
    fewer
    than three
    operating
    levels,
    if:
    (1)
    The
    owner
    or
    operator provides
    a
    technical
    justification
    in the
    hardcopy
    portion
    of the
    monitoring
    plan for
    the
    unit
    required
    under 40
    CFR
    75.53(e)(2),
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    demonstrating
    that the
    unit operates
    at only
    one level or
    two levels
    during
    normal
    operation
    (excluding
    unit
    startup
    and
    shutdown).
    Appropriate
    documentation
    and
    data must
    be
    provided
    to
    support
    the claim
    of
    single-level
    or
    two-level
    operation;
    and
    (2)
    The
    justification
    provided
    in
    paragraph
    (e)(1)
    of this
    Section
    is deemed
    to be
    acceptable
    by
    the
    permitting
    authority.
    6.5.2.1
    Range
    of Operation
    and
    Normal
    Load
    (or
    Operating)
    Level(s)
    24

    (a
    Theowneror”operator
    must
    dëtermine
    the:
    ‘ge
    of•
    operation”
    as
    follows
    for
    each
    unit
    (or
    combination
    of
    units,
    for
    common
    stack
    configurations):
    (1)
    For
    affected
    units
    that
    produce electrical:
    output
    (in
    megawatts)
    or:
    thermal
    output
    (in
    klb/hr
    of
    steam
    production
    or
    mmBtulhr),
    the
    lower
    boundary
    of
    the
    range
    of
    operation
    of
    a
    unit
    must
    be
    the
    minimum
    safe,
    stable
    loads
    for
    any
    of
    the units
    discharging
    through
    the
    stack.
    Alternatively,
    for
    a
    group
    of
    frequently-operated
    units
    that
    serve
    a
    common
    stack,
    the
    sum
    of
    the
    minimum
    safe,
    stable
    loads
    for
    the individual
    units
    may
    be
    used
    as
    the
    lower
    boundary
    of
    the
    range
    of
    operation.
    The
    upper
    boundary
    of
    the
    range
    of
    operation
    of
    a
    unit
    must
    be
    the
    maximum
    sustainable
    load.
    The
    “maximum
    sustainable
    load”
    is
    the
    higher
    of
    either:
    the
    nameplate
    or
    rated
    capacity
    of
    the
    unit,
    less
    any physical
    or
    regulatory
    limitations
    or
    other
    deratings;
    or
    the highest
    sustainable
    load,
    based
    on
    at
    least
    four
    quarters
    of
    representative
    historical
    operating
    data.
    For
    common
    stacks,
    the
    maximum
    sustainable
    load
    is
    the
    sum
    of
    all
    of
    the maximum
    sustainable
    loads
    of
    the
    individual
    units
    discharging
    through
    the
    stack,
    unless
    this
    load
    is
    unattainable
    in
    practice,
    in
    which
    case
    use
    the
    highest
    sustainable
    combined
    load
    for
    the
    units
    that
    discharge
    through
    the
    stack.
    Based
    on
    at
    least
    four
    quarters
    of
    representative
    historical
    operating
    data.
    The
    load
    values
    for
    the
    unit(s)
    must
    be
    expressed
    either
    in
    units
    of
    megawatts
    of
    thousands
    of
    lb/hr
    of
    steam
    load
    or
    mmBtu!hr
    of
    thermal
    output;
    or
    (2)
    For affected
    units
    that
    do not
    produce
    electrical
    or
    thermal
    output,
    the
    lower
    boundary
    of
    the
    range
    of
    operation
    must
    be
    the
    minimum
    expected
    flue
    gas
    velocity
    (in
    ft/sec)
    during
    normal,
    stable
    operation
    of
    the unit.
    The
    upper
    boundary
    of
    the
    range
    of
    operation
    must
    be the
    maximum
    potential
    flue
    gas velocity
    (in
    fi/sec)
    as
    defined
    in
    Section
    2.1.2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    The
    minimum
    expected
    and
    maximum
    potential
    velocities
    may
    be derived
    from
    the
    results
    of
    reference
    method
    testing
    or
    by
    using
    Equation
    A-3a
    or
    A-3b
    (as
    applicable)
    in
    Section
    2.1.2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    If
    Equation
    A-3a
    or
    A-3b
    is
    used
    to
    determine
    the
    minimum
    expected
    velocity,
    replace
    the
    .word
    “maximum”
    with
    the
    word
    “minimum”
    in
    the
    definitions
    of
    “MPV,”
    “Hf,”
    °2d
    ,“
    and
    %H
    20
    ,“
    arid
    replace
    the
    word
    “minimum”
    with
    the
    word
    “maximum”
    in
    the
    definition
    of
    “CO
    1
    .”
    Alternatively,
    0.0
    ft/sec
    may
    be
    used
    as
    the
    lower
    boundary
    of
    the
    range
    of
    operation.
    b)
    The operating
    levels
    for
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audits
    will,
    except
    for
    peaking
    units,
    be
    defined
    as
    follows:
    the
    “low”
    operating
    level
    will
    be
    the
    first 30.0
    percent
    of
    the
    range
    of
    operation;
    the
    “mid”
    operating
    level
    will
    be
    the middle
    portion
    (>30.0
    percent,
    but
    <=60.0
    percent)
    of
    the
    range
    of
    operation;
    and the
    “high”
    operating
    level
    will
    be the
    upper
    end
    (>60.0 percent)
    of
    the
    range
    of
    operation.
    For example,
    if
    the
    upper
    and
    lower
    boundaries
    of
    the
    range
    of
    operation
    are
    100
    and
    1100
    megawatts,
    respectively,
    then
    the
    low,
    mid,
    and
    high
    operating
    levels
    would
    be
    100
    to
    400
    megawatts,
    400
    to
    700 megawatts,
    and
    700
    to
    1100
    megawatts,
    respectively.
    (c)
    Units
    that
    do not
    produce
    electrical
    or
    thermal
    output are
    exempted
    from
    the
    requirements
    of
    this
    paragraph,
    (c). The
    owner
    or
    operator
    must
    identify,
    for
    each
    affected
    unit
    or
    common
    stack,
    the
    “normal”
    load
    level
    or levels
    (low,
    mid
    or
    high),
    based
    on
    the
    operating
    history
    of
    the
    unit(s).
    To
    identify
    the
    normal
    load
    level(s), the
    owner
    or
    operator
    must,
    at
    a
    minimum,
    determine
    the
    relative
    number
    of
    operating
    hours
    at
    each
    of
    the
    three
    load
    levels,
    low,
    mid
    and
    high
    over
    the
    past
    four
    25

    representative
    .operating’guarteis
    The
    owner:oroperatormust
    determine.,
    tothenearest’0Jpercent,
    the
    percentage of
    the time that each
    load level
    (low,
    mid,
    high)
    has been used
    during
    that
    time
    period.
    A summary
    of th data used
    for this determination
    and
    the calculated results
    must
    be kept
    on-
    site
    in
    a
    format suitable for
    inspection.
    For
    new
    units
    or
    newly-affected
    units,
    the data
    analysis
    in
    this
    paragraph
    may
    be based
    on fewer
    than four
    quarters
    of data
    if
    fewer
    than four
    representative
    quarters
    of
    historical
    load
    data are
    available.
    Or,
    if no historical
    load
    data
    are available,
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    may
    designate
    the
    normal
    load
    based
    on the
    expected
    or
    projected
    manner
    of
    operating
    the
    unit. However,
    in either
    case, once four quarters
    of
    representative
    data become
    available,
    the
    historical
    load
    analysis must be
    repeated.
    (d)
    Determination
    of normal load
    (or
    operating
    level)
    (1)
    Based
    on
    the analysis of the
    historical
    load data described
    in paragraph
    (c)
    of
    this
    Section.
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    must, for
    units that produce
    electrical
    or thermal output,
    designate
    the
    most
    frequently
    used load level as the
    normal
    load
    level for the unit
    (or
    combination
    of units,
    for
    common
    stacks).
    The
    owner or operator
    may also designate
    the second
    most frequently
    used load
    level
    as
    an
    additional
    normal load level
    for the
    unit or
    stack. If the manner
    of operation
    of
    the unit
    changes
    significantly,
    such
    that
    the
    designated
    normal
    load(s) or the
    two most
    frequently used
    load
    levels
    change, the
    owner
    or
    operator
    must repeat
    the historical
    load analysis and
    must
    redesignate
    the
    normal
    lodis)
    and
    the
    two
    most frequently
    used load levels,
    as appropriate.
    A
    minimum
    of
    two
    representative
    quarters
    of historical
    load data are required
    to document
    that a
    change
    in
    the
    maimer
    of
    unit operation
    has occurred.
    Update
    the
    electronic
    monitoring
    plan whenever
    the
    normal
    load
    level(s)
    and the
    two most frequently-used
    load levels
    are redesignated.
    (2)
    For
    units that do not
    produce
    electrical
    or thermal output,
    the
    normal
    operating
    level(s)
    must
    be
    determined
    using
    sound
    engineering
    judgment,
    based
    on knowledge
    of the unit
    and
    operajpg
    experience
    with the industrial
    process.
    (e)
    The owner or
    operator
    must report
    the
    upper
    and
    lower boundaries
    of the range
    of
    operation
    for
    each unit
    (or
    combination
    of units,
    for common
    stacks),
    in units
    of megawatts
    or
    thousands
    of lb/hr
    or
    mmBtu/hr of steam
    production
    or ft/sec
    (as
    applicable),
    in the
    electronic monitoring
    plan
    required
    under Section
    1.10
    of
    this Appendix.
    6.5.2.2 Multi-Load
    (or
    Multi-Level)
    Flow
    RATA
    Results
    For
    each
    multi-load
    (or
    multi-level)
    flow RATA,
    calculate
    the
    flow monitor
    relative
    accuracy
    at each
    operating
    level. If a flow
    monitor relative accuracy
    test is
    failed or
    aborted
    due to a
    problem
    with
    the
    monitor on any
    level
    of a 2-level
    (or 3-level)
    relative
    accuracy
    test audit, the
    RATA
    must
    be
    repeated at that
    load
    (or operating)
    level. However,
    the entire 2-level
    (or 3-level)
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audit
    does not
    have
    to be repeated
    unless
    the
    flow monitor polynomial
    coefficients
    or
    K-factor(s)
    are
    changed,
    in
    which
    case
    a 3- level RATA is required
    (or,
    a 2-level RATA,
    for
    units
    demonstrated
    to
    operate at only
    two levels, under
    Section
    6.5.2(e)
    of this
    Exhibit).
    26

    6.5.3
    Calculations
    Using
    the
    data from
    the
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audits,
    calculate
    relative
    accuracy
    and
    bias
    in
    accordanc:e
    with theprocedures
    an&equations::specifiád
    iii
    Section
    7
    of
    this.
    Exhibit.:.:
    6;5.4
    Reference
    MethodMeasurement
    Location
    Select
    a
    location
    for
    reference
    method
    measurements
    that
    is
    (1)
    accessible;
    (2)
    in
    the
    same
    proximity
    as
    the
    monitor
    or
    monitoring
    system
    location;
    and
    (3)
    meets
    the
    requirements
    of
    Performance
    Specification
    3
    in
    appendix
    B
    of
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    for
    CO
    1
    or
    02
    monitors,
    or
    Method
    I
    (or
    1A)
    in
    appendix
    A
    of
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.
    14,
    for
    volumetric
    flow,
    except
    as
    otherwise
    indicated
    in
    this
    Section
    or
    as
    approved
    by
    the
    Agency.
    6.5.5
    Reference
    Method
    Traverse
    Point
    Selection
    Select
    traverse
    points
    that
    ensure
    acquisition
    of
    representative
    samples
    of
    pollutant
    and
    diluent
    concentrations,
    moisture
    content,
    temperature,
    and
    flue
    gas
    flow
    rate
    over
    the
    flue
    cross
    Section.
    To
    achieve
    this,
    the
    reference
    method
    traverse
    points
    must
    meet
    the
    requirements
    of
    Section
    8.1.3
    of
    Performance
    Specification
    2
    (“PS No.
    2”)
    in
    appendix
    B
    to
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140
    (for
    moisture
    monitoring
    system
    RATAs),
    Performance
    Specification
    3 in
    appendix
    B
    to
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140
    (for
    02
    and
    CO
    2
    monitor
    RATAs),
    Method
    1
    (or
    1A)
    (for
    volumetric
    flow
    rate
    monitor
    RATAs),
    Method
    3
    (for
    molecular
    weight),
    and
    Method 4
    (for
    moisture
    determination) in
    appendix
    A
    to
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section 225.140. The
    following
    alternative
    reference
    method
    traverse
    point
    locations
    are
    permitted
    for
    moisture
    and
    gas
    monitor
    RATAs:
    (a)
    For
    moisture
    determinations
    where
    the
    moisture
    data
    are
    used
    only
    to
    determine
    stack
    g
    molecular
    weight,
    a
    single
    reference
    method
    point,
    located
    at least
    1.0
    meter
    from
    the
    stack
    wall,
    may
    be
    used. For
    moisture
    monitoring
    system
    RATAs
    and
    for
    gas
    monitor
    RATAs
    in
    which
    moisture
    data
    are
    used
    to
    correct
    pollutant
    or
    diluent
    concentrations
    from
    a
    dry
    basis
    to
    a
    wet
    basis
    (or
    vice-versa),
    single-point
    moisture
    sampling
    may
    only be
    used
    if
    the
    12-point
    stratification
    test
    described
    in
    Section 6.5.5.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    is performed
    prior
    to
    the
    RATA
    for
    at
    least
    one
    pollutant
    or
    diluent
    gas,
    and
    if
    the
    test
    is
    passed
    according
    to
    the
    acceptance
    criteria
    in
    Section
    6.5.5.3(b)
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    (b)
    For
    gas
    monitoring
    system
    RATAs,
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    may
    use
    any
    of
    the
    following
    options:
    (1)
    At
    any
    location (including
    locations
    where
    stratification
    is
    expected),
    use
    a
    minimum
    of
    six
    traverse points
    along
    a
    diameter,
    in
    the
    direction
    of
    any
    expected
    stratification.
    The
    points must
    be
    located
    in
    accordance
    with
    Method
    1 in
    appendix
    A
    to
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140.
    27

    (2).
    At
    lëations:
    whereSection 8.E3.cf PSNy.2
    short
    reference’method
    measurement
    line
    (with
    three points
    located
    at 0.4, 1.2, and 2.0 meters
    from the stack
    wall),
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    may use an
    alternative
    3-point
    measurement line, locating
    the three
    points
    at 4:4,
    14.6,
    and 29.6 percent ofthe way across thestack,. in accordance. with
    Method 1 in
    appendix, A to 40
    • CFR 60, incorporated by reference in Section 225.140.
    (3)
    At locations where stratification is likely to occur (e.g., following
    a wet scrubber
    or
    when
    dissimilar
    gas streams are combined), the short measurement line
    from Section 8.1.3 of
    PS
    No. 2
    (or
    the alternative
    line
    described in paragraph
    (b)(2)
    of this
    Section)
    may
    be
    used in
    lieu
    of
    the
    prescribed “long” measurement line in Section 8.1.3 of
    PS No. 2, provided
    that the
    12-point
    stratification
    test described in
    Section
    6.5.5.1 of this Exhibit is performed
    and passed one
    time
    at
    the
    location
    (according
    to the acceptance criteria
    of
    Section
    6.5.5.3(a) of this
    Exhibit)
    and
    provided
    that
    either the
    12-point
    stratification test or the
    alternative
    (abbreviated)
    stratification test
    in
    Section
    6.5.5.2 of this Exhibit is performed and passed prior to each
    subsequent RATA at
    the
    location
    (according
    to
    the acceptance criteria of Section
    6.5.5.3(a)
    of
    this Exhibit).
    (4)
    A single
    reference method measurement
    point,
    located no less than 1.0
    meter from the
    stack
    wall
    and
    situated
    along one of the measurement lines
    used for the stratification
    test,
    may
    be
    used
    at
    any
    sampling
    location if the 12-point stratification test described in
    Section 6.5.5.1 of
    this
    Exhibit
    is
    performed and passed prior to each RATA at the location (according
    to the acceptance
    criteria
    of
    Section
    6.5.5.3(b)
    of this
    Exhibit).
    (c)
    For mercury
    monitoring systems, use
    the same
    basic
    approach for traverse
    point
    selection
    that
    is
    used for the other
    gas monitoring system RATAs,
    except
    that
    the stratification
    test
    provisions
    in
    Sections 8.1.3
    through 8.1.3.5 of
    Method
    30A
    must
    apply, rather
    than the
    provisions of
    Sections
    6.5.5.1
    through 6.5.5.3 of this Exhibit.
    6.5.5.1 Stratification
    Test
    (a)
    With the
    unit(s)
    operating
    under
    steady-state
    conditions at the
    normal load level
    (or normal
    operating
    level),
    as defined in Section 6.5.2:1 of this Exhibit, use
    a traversing
    gas sampling
    probe
    to
    measure
    diluent
    (CQ
    or
    O)
    concentrations at a minimum of twelve
    (12) points, located
    according
    to
    Method
    1 in
    appendix A to 40 CFR 60,
    incorporated by reference in
    Section 225.140.
    (b) Use
    Method3A in appendix A to 40
    CFR 60,
    incorporated
    by reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    to
    make
    the
    measurements. Data from the reference method
    analyzers must
    be quality
    assured
    by
    performing
    analyzer
    calibration error and system
    bias
    checks
    before the series
    of
    measurements
    and
    by
    conducting
    system bias and calibration drift checks
    after the measurements,
    in
    accordance
    with
    the
    procedures
    of Method 3A.
    (c)
    Measure
    for a
    minimum of 2 minutes at
    each traverse point. To
    the extent practicable,
    complete
    the
    traverse within
    a 2-hour period.
    28

    (d)
    If
    the
    load
    has
    remained
    constant
    (+-3
    .0
    percent) during
    the•
    traverse
    and
    if
    the
    reference
    method
    analyzers
    have
    passed
    all
    of
    the
    required
    quality
    assurance
    checks,
    proceed
    with
    the
    data
    analysis.
    (e)
    Calculate
    the
    average
    CO
    2
    (or
    02)
    concentrations
    at
    each
    of
    the.
    individual
    traverse
    points.
    Then,
    calculate
    the arithmeticaverage
    CO
    2
    (or
    02)
    concentrations
    for
    a1ltraverse
    points.
    6.5.5.2
    Alternative
    (Abbreviated)
    Stratification
    Test
    (a)
    With
    the
    unit(s)
    operating
    under
    steady-state
    conditions
    at
    the
    normal
    load
    level
    (or
    normal
    operating
    level),
    as
    defined
    in
    Section
    6.5.2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    use
    a traversing
    gas
    sampling
    probe
    to
    measure
    the diluent
    (CO
    2
    or
    02)
    concentrations
    at
    three
    points.
    The
    points
    must
    be
    located
    according
    to
    the
    specifications
    for
    the
    long
    measurement
    line
    in
    Section
    8.1.3
    of
    PS
    No.
    2
    (i.e..
    locate
    the
    points
    16.7
    percent,
    50.0 percent,
    and 83.3
    percent
    of
    the
    way
    across
    the
    stack).
    Alternatively,
    the
    concentration
    measurements
    may
    be
    made
    at
    six
    traverse
    points
    along
    a
    diameter.
    The
    six
    points
    must
    be
    located
    in
    accordance
    with
    Method
    1
    in
    appendix
    A
    to
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140;
    (b)
    Use
    Method
    3A
    in
    appendix
    A
    to
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    to
    make
    the
    measurements.
    Data
    from
    the
    reference
    method
    analyzers
    must
    be
    quality
    assured
    by
    performing
    analyzer
    calibration
    error
    and
    system
    bias
    checks
    before
    the
    series
    of
    measurements
    and
    by
    conducting
    system
    bias
    and
    calibration
    drift
    checks
    after
    the
    measurements,
    in
    accordance
    with
    the
    procedures
    of
    Method
    3A.
    (c)
    Measure
    for
    a
    minimum
    of
    2
    minutes
    at
    each
    traverse
    point.
    To
    the
    extent
    practicable,
    complete
    the
    traverse
    withina
    1-hour
    period.
    (d)
    If
    the
    load
    has remained
    constant (+-3.0
    percent)
    during
    the
    traverse
    and
    if
    the
    reference
    method
    analyzers
    have passed
    all
    of
    the
    required
    quality
    assurance
    checks,
    proceed
    with
    the
    data
    analysis.
    (e)
    Calculate
    tne
    average
    CO
    2
    (or
    0)
    concentrations
    at
    each
    of
    the
    individual
    traverse
    points.
    T1,
    calculate
    the anti
    CC
    ‘‘-
    for
    all
    trp”;
    -—ntg
    6.5.5.3
    Stratification
    Test
    Results
    and
    Acceptance
    Criteria
    (a)
    For
    each
    diluent
    gas, the
    short
    reference
    method
    measurement
    line
    described
    in
    Section
    8.1.3
    of
    PS
    No. 2
    may
    be
    used
    in
    lieu
    of
    the
    long
    measurement
    line prescribed
    in
    Section
    8.1.3
    of
    PS
    No. 2
    if
    the
    results
    of
    a
    stratification
    test,
    conducted
    in
    accordance
    with
    Section
    6.5.5.1
    or
    6.5.5.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    (as
    appropriate:
    see Section
    6.5.5(b)(3)
    of
    this
    Exhibit), show
    that
    the concentration
    at
    each
    individual
    traverse
    point
    differs
    by
    no
    more
    than
    +-10.0
    percent
    from
    the arithmetic
    average
    concentration
    for
    all
    traverse
    points.
    The results
    are
    also
    acceptable
    if
    the
    concentration
    at
    each
    individual
    traverse
    point
    differs
    by
    no
    more
    than
    +-Sppm
    or
    +-0.5
    percent
    CQ
    2
    (or
    0)
    from
    the
    arithmetic
    average
    concentration
    for
    all
    traverse
    points.
    29

    (b)
    For
    each
    diluent
    gas,
    a single
    reference
    method
    measurement
    point,
    located
    at least
    1.0
    meter
    from
    the stack
    wall
    and
    situated
    along
    One
    of the
    measurement
    lines
    used
    for
    the
    stratification
    test,
    may
    be
    used
    for
    that diluent
    gas
    if the
    results
    of
    a
    stratification
    test.
    conducted
    in
    accordance
    with
    Section
    6.5.5.1
    of this
    Exhibit,
    show
    that
    the concentration
    at
    each
    individual
    traverse
    point
    differs
    by no
    more
    than
    +-5.0
    percent
    from thearithmetic
    average
    concentration
    for
    all traverse
    points.
    The
    results
    are
    also
    acceptable
    if
    the
    concentration
    at
    each
    individual
    traverse
    point
    differs
    by
    no
    more
    than
    +-3
    ppm
    or
    +-0.3
    percent
    CO2
    (or
    O)
    from
    the
    arithmetic
    average
    concentration
    for
    all
    traverse
    points.
    (c)
    The owner
    or
    operator
    must
    keep
    the results
    of
    all stratification
    tests
    on-site,
    in a
    format
    suitable
    for
    inspection,
    as
    part
    of
    the supplementary
    RATA
    records
    required
    under
    Section
    1.1
    3(a)(7)
    of
    this
    Appendix.
    6.5.6
    Sampling
    Strategy
    (a)
    Conduct
    the
    reference
    method
    tests
    so
    they will
    yield
    results
    representative
    of
    the
    pollutant
    concentration, emission
    rate,
    moisture,
    temperature,
    and
    flue
    gas
    flow rate
    from
    the
    unit and
    can
    be
    correlated
    with
    the pollutant
    concentration
    monitor,
    2
    CO
    or
    02
    monitor,
    flow
    monitor,
    and
    mercury
    CEMS
    measurements.
    The minimum
    acceptable
    time
    for
    a gas
    monitoring
    system
    RATA
    run
    or
    for
    a
    moisture
    monitoring
    system
    RATA
    run
    is 21
    minutes.
    For
    each
    run
    of
    a gas monitoring
    system
    RATA,
    all
    necessary
    pollutant
    concentration
    measurements,
    diluent
    concentration
    measurements,
    and
    moisture
    measurements
    (if
    applicable)
    must,
    to
    the extent
    practicable,
    be
    made
    within
    a
    60-
    minute
    period.
    For
    flow
    monitor
    RATAs,
    the
    minimum
    time
    per
    run must
    be
    5 minutes.
    Flow
    rate
    reference
    method
    measurements
    may
    be
    made
    either
    sequentially
    from port
    to
    port
    or
    simultaneously
    at
    two
    or more
    sample
    ports.
    The
    velocity
    measurement
    probe
    may be
    moved
    from
    traverse
    point
    to
    traverse
    point
    either
    manually
    orautomatically.
    If,
    during
    a flow
    RATA,
    significant
    pulsations
    in
    the
    reference
    method
    readings
    are
    observed,
    be
    sure
    to
    allow
    enough
    measurement
    time
    at each
    traverse
    point
    to
    obtain
    an
    accurate
    average
    reading
    when
    a
    manual
    readout
    method
    is
    used
    (e.g.,
    a
    “sight-
    weighted”
    average
    from
    a
    manometer).
    Also,
    allow
    sufficient
    measurement
    time to
    ensure
    that
    stable
    temperature
    readings
    are
    obtained
    at
    each
    traverse
    point,
    particularly
    at the
    first
    rnasurement
    point
    t,
    .
    -
    ii
    po-to-on
    minimum
    of
    one
    set
    of
    auxiliary
    measur.ments
    for
    stack
    gas molecular
    weight
    determination
    (i.e.,
    diluent
    gas
    data
    and
    moisture
    data)
    is
    required
    for
    every
    clock
    hour
    of
    a flow
    RATA
    or
    for every
    three
    test
    runs
    (whichever
    is
    less
    restrictive).
    Alternatively,
    moisture
    measurements
    for
    molecular
    weight
    determination may
    be performed
    before
    and
    after
    a
    series
    of
    flow RATA
    runs
    at
    a particular
    load
    level
    (low,
    mid,
    or
    high),
    provided
    that
    the
    time
    interval
    between
    the two
    moisture
    measurements
    does
    not
    exceed
    three
    hours.
    If this
    option
    is selected,
    the
    results
    of
    the two
    moisture
    determinations
    must
    be
    averaged
    arithmetically
    and
    applied
    to
    all RATA
    runs
    in
    the series.
    Successive
    flow
    RATA
    runs
    may
    be
    performed
    without
    waiting
    in-between
    runs. If
    an
    02
    -diluent
    monitor
    is
    used
    as
    a
    CO7
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    system,
    perform
    a 2
    CO
    system
    RATA
    (i.e.,
    measure
    CO,.
    rather
    thanQ2,
    with
    the
    reference
    method).
    For
    moisture
    monitoring
    systems,
    an
    appropriate
    coefficient,
    “K”
    factor
    or
    other
    suitable
    mathematical
    algorithm
    may
    be
    developed
    prior
    to the
    RATA,
    to
    adjust
    30

    themonitorng’svstemreadingswithrespect
    to
    thereference
    rnethbd
    ifsucfräcoeffiiient
    K-factor
    or
    algorithm
    is
    developed,
    it
    must
    be
    applied
    to
    the
    CEMS
    readings
    during
    the
    RATA
    and
    (if
    the
    RATA
    is
    passed),
    to
    the
    subsequent
    CEMS
    data,
    by
    means
    of
    the
    automated
    data
    acquisition
    and
    handling.
    coefficient,
    K
    factor
    or
    algorithm,
    as
    specified
    in
    Section
    l.13(a)(5)(F)
    of
    this
    Appendix.
    Whenever
    the
    coefficient,
    K
    factor
    or
    algorithm
    is
    changed,
    a
    RATA
    of
    the
    moisture
    monitoring
    system
    is
    required.
    For
    the
    RATA
    of
    a
    mercury
    CEMS
    using
    the
    Ontario
    Hydro
    Method,
    or
    for
    the
    RATA
    of
    a
    sorbent
    trap
    system
    (irrespective
    of
    the
    reference
    method
    used),
    the
    time
    per
    run
    must
    be
    long
    enough
    to
    collect
    a
    sufficient
    mass
    of
    mercury
    to
    analyze.
    For
    the
    RATA
    of
    a
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system,
    the
    type
    of
    sorbent
    material
    used
    by
    the
    traps
    must
    be
    the
    same
    as
    for
    daily
    operation
    of
    the
    monitoring
    system;
    however,
    the
    size
    of
    the
    traps
    used
    for
    the
    RATA
    may
    be
    smaller
    than
    the
    traps
    used
    for
    daily
    operation
    of
    the
    system.
    Spike
    the
    third
    section
    of
    each
    sorbent
    trap
    with
    elemental
    mercury,
    as
    described
    in
    Section
    7.1.2
    of
    Exhibit
    D
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    Install
    a
    new
    pair
    of
    sorbent
    traps
    prior
    to
    each
    test
    run.
    For
    each
    run,
    the
    sorbent
    trap
    data
    must
    be
    validated
    according
    to
    the
    quality
    assurance
    -
    criteria
    in
    Section
    8
    of
    Exhibit
    D
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    (b)
    To
    properly
    correlate
    individual
    mercury
    CEMS
    data
    (in
    lbIMMBtu)
    and
    volumetric
    flow
    rate
    data
    with
    the
    reference
    method
    data,
    annotate
    the
    beginning
    and
    end
    of
    each
    reference
    method
    test
    run
    (including
    the
    exact
    time
    of
    day)
    on
    the
    individual
    chart
    recorder(s)
    or
    other
    permanent
    recording
    device(s).
    6.5.7
    Correlation
    of
    Reference
    Method
    and
    Continuous
    Emission
    Monitoring
    System
    Confirm
    that
    the.
    monitor
    or.
    monitoring
    system.
    and
    reference
    method
    test
    results
    are
    on
    consistent
    moisture,
    pressure,
    temperature,
    and
    diluent
    concentration
    basis
    (e.g.,
    since
    the
    flow
    monitor
    measures
    flow
    rate
    on
    a
    wet
    basis,
    Method
    2
    test
    results
    must
    also
    be
    on
    a
    wet
    basis).
    Compare
    flow-
    monitor
    and
    reference
    method
    results
    on
    a
    scfh
    basis.
    Also,
    consider
    the
    response
    times
    of
    the
    pollutant
    concentration
    monitor,
    the
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    system,
    and
    the
    flow
    monitoring
    system
    to
    ensure
    comparison
    of
    simultaneous
    measurements.
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audit
    run,
    compare
    the
    measurements
    obtained
    from
    the
    monitor
    or
    continuourn
    monitoring
    system
    (in
    ppm.
    percent
    CO,
    lb/mmBtu,
    or
    other
    units)
    against
    the
    corresponding
    reference
    metno
    the
    paired
    data
    in
    a
    table
    such
    as
    the
    one
    shown
    in
    Figure
    2.
    6.5.8
    Number
    of
    Reference
    Method
    Tests
    Perform
    a
    minimum
    of
    nine
    sets
    of
    paired
    monitor
    (or
    monitoring
    system)
    and
    reference
    method
    test
    data
    for
    every
    required
    (i.e.,
    certification,
    recertification,
    diagnostic,
    semiannual,
    or
    annual)
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audit.
    For
    2-level
    and
    3-level
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audits
    of
    flow
    monitors,
    perform
    a
    minimum
    of
    nine
    sets
    at
    each
    of
    the
    operating
    levels.
    6.5.9
    Reference
    Methods
    31

    The following
    methods are
    from
    appendix
    A to 40
    CFR 60, incorporated
    by reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    or have been
    published.
    by
    ASTM, and
    are the reference
    methods for
    perfO.ing
    relative
    accuracy
    test audits
    under.
    this
    part: Method
    1 or 1A in.
    appendix A-i to
    40 CFR
    60
    for
    siting;
    Method 2 in
    appendices
    A-i
    and A-2 to
    40 CFR 60 or its. allowable
    alternatives
    in
    appendix
    A to 40
    CFR 60
    (except
    for
    Methods
    2B and 2E in
    appendix
    A-i
    to 40 CFR
    60)
    for stack
    gas
    velocity
    and
    volumetric
    flow rate;
    Methods 3, 3A or
    3B in
    appendix
    A-2
    to 40
    CFR
    60 for
    02
    and
    C0
    2;
    Method
    4
    in
    appendix A-3 to 40
    CFR 60 for
    moisture; and
    for mercury, either
    ASTM
    D6784-02
    (the
    Ontario
    Hydro
    Method)
    (incorporated
    by reference
    under Section
    225.140),
    Method
    29 in
    appendix
    A-8
    to
    40
    CFR
    60,
    Method
    30A,
    or
    Method
    30B.
    7.
    Calculations
    7.1 Linearity
    Check
    Analyze
    the linearity
    data for pollutant
    concentration
    monitors as follows.
    Calculate
    the
    Percentage
    error
    in linearity
    based upon the reference
    value
    at
    the low-level,
    mid-level,
    and
    high-level
    concentrations
    specified
    in Section
    6.2 of
    this
    Exhibit. Perform
    this calculation
    once
    during
    the
    certification test.
    Use the following
    equation
    to
    calculate the error
    in linearity
    for
    each
    reference
    value.
    jR-At
    LE
    =
    x
    100
    (EquatiOn
    A-4)
    R
    where,
    LE=Percentage Linearity
    error, based
    upon the reference
    value.
    R=Reference
    value
    of Low-, mid-,
    or
    high-level
    calibration
    gas
    introduced
    into the monitoring
    system.
    A=Average
    of
    the monitoring system
    responses.
    7
    ‘ ‘Ziiiration
    Error
    i Pollutant
    Concentration
    and Diluent
    Monitors
    aci
    relerence value,
    calculate
    the
    percentage
    calibration
    error
    based upon instrument
    span
    for
    daily
    calibration error
    tests
    using
    the
    following
    equation:
    CE=
    xlOO
    (EquationA-5)
    32

    where
    CE
    Calibration
    error
    as
    a percentage
    of
    the
    span
    of
    the
    instrument.
    R
    =
    Reference
    value
    of
    zero
    or
    upscale
    (high-level
    or
    mid-level,
    as
    applicable)
    calibration
    gas
    introduced
    into
    the
    monitoring
    system.
    A
    =
    Actual
    monitoring
    system
    response
    to
    the
    calibration
    gas.
    S
    Span
    of
    the
    instrument,
    as
    specified
    in
    Section
    2
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    7.2.2
    Flow
    Monitor
    Calibration
    Error
    For
    each
    reference
    value,
    calculate
    the
    percentage
    calibration
    error
    based
    upon
    span
    using
    the
    following
    equation:
    R-AI
    CE
    =
    x
    100
    (Equation
    A-6)
    where,
    CE
    =
    Calibration
    error
    as
    a
    percentage
    of
    span.
    R
    =
    Low
    or
    high level
    reference
    value
    specified
    in
    Section
    2.2.2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    A
    =
    Actual flow
    monitor
    response
    to
    the
    reference
    value.
    5
    Flow
    monitor
    calibration
    span
    value
    as
    determined
    under
    Section
    2.1.2.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    7.3
    Relative
    Accuracy
    for
    O
    Monitors,
    Mercury
    Monitoring
    Systems,
    and
    Flow
    Monitors
    Analyze
    the
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audit
    data
    from
    the
    reference
    method
    tests
    for
    CO
    2
    or
    02
    monitors
    used
    only
    for
    heat input
    rate
    determination,
    mercury
    monitoring
    systems
    used
    to
    determine
    mercury
    mass emissions
    under
    Sections
    1.14
    through
    1.18
    of
    Appendix
    B,
    and
    flow
    monitors
    using
    the
    following
    procedures.
    Summarize
    the
    results
    on
    a
    data
    sheet.
    An
    example
    is
    shown
    in
    Figure
    2.
    Calculate
    the
    mean
    of
    the
    monitor
    or
    monitoring
    system
    measurement
    values.
    Calculate
    the
    mean
    of
    the
    reference
    method
    values.
    Using
    data
    from
    the
    automated
    data
    acquisition
    and
    handling
    system,
    calculate
    the
    arithmetic
    differences
    between
    the
    reference
    method
    and
    monitor
    measurement
    data
    sets. Then calculate
    the
    arithmetic
    mean
    of
    the
    difference,
    the
    standard
    deviation,
    the
    confidence
    coefficient,
    and
    the
    monitor
    or
    monitoring
    system
    relative
    accuracy
    using
    the
    following
    procedures
    and
    equations.
    33

    7.3.1
    Arithmetic
    Mean
    Calculate the
    arithmetic
    mean
    of the
    differences, d, of a
    data set as follows.
    d
    =
    d,
    (Equation
    A-7)
    where,
    n = Number
    of data points.
    d1
    = The difference
    between a reference
    method value
    and the corresponding
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    system value
    (RM
    1
    —CEM1
    )
    at a given
    point
    in time
    i.
    7.3.2 Standard
    Deviation
    Calculate the
    standard deviation,
    Sd,
    of a data set as follows:
    4
    L=
    The difference
    between
    a
    reference
    method
    value
    and the
    corresponding
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring system
    value
    (RM
    1
    —CEM) at a
    given
    point
    in
    time i.
    7.3.3 Confidence
    Coefficient
    Calculate
    the
    confidence coefficient
    (one-tailed),
    cc, of a
    data
    set
    as
    follows:
    Sd
    (Equation
    A-8)
    where,
    n
    = Number
    of data points.
    34

    ‘‘
    [I
    ::::::::::
    J.L
    CD
    1
    +
    1’
    I
    i
    I
    J3j
    C)
    C
    .
    x
    t)
    M
    t
    W
    W
    4
    01
    H
    W
    I
    01
    I
    C
    )
    I
    -.
    :
    I
    CD.
    CD
    I
    II
    b
    H
    l-t
    I
    IHIH
    fZ
    CD
    C
    I
    CD
    0
    I
    I
    -
    CD
    1+)
    I
    11
    .
    2
    I.
    1
    Tj
    CD
    C)
    .
    I
    I
    C
    00
    OHHHHHHH
    I
    P)
    C
    CD
    I
    DOHwao
    I
    H
    CD
    0
    WHQQHQQ
    I
    CD
    I
    I
    :
    -
    C)
    .I.
    rt
    I
    CD
    CD
    —.
    CD
    -
    I
    0
    0
    0
    0
    Io
    a,
    J
    o
    01
    W
    I
    4
    C)
    CD
    I
    101
    a,
    CD
    .
    I
    -
    101
    —.
    C)
    ci
    C)
    CD
    H
    CD
    I
    HMM
    jjjj
    I
    -.-
    g
    D0
    00000
    9..
    I
    ooj
    —‘
    -
    I
    0
    0
    H
    01
    a,
    to
    a
    0
    ,i
    ID
    I
    a,
    a,
    .
    -
    CD
    CD
    CD
    0
    C)
    CD
    o
    CD
    -4
    0
    o
    o
    -4
    CD
    a,
    CD
    CD

    concentration monitoring
    systems, and sorbent trap monitoring systems, using
    the
    procedures
    outlined
    in Sections 7.4.1 through 7.4.4 of this Exhibit. For multiple-load flow
    RATAs,
    perform
    a
    bias test.at each lOad leveldesignated as normal under
    SectiOn 6.5.2.1 of this. Exhibit;
    7.4.1
    Arithmetic Mean
    Calculate
    the arithmetic mean
    of
    the difference, “d”,
    of the data set
    using
    Equation
    A-7
    of
    this
    Exhibit. To calculate bias
    for a
    flow monitor, “d” is,
    for each paired data point,
    the
    difference
    between the flow rate values
    (in
    scfh)
    obtained from the
    reference method and the
    monitor.
    To
    calculate
    bias for a
    mercury
    monitoring
    system
    when using the Ontario
    Hydro
    Method or
    Method
    29
    im appendix A-8 to 40 CFR
    60,
    incorporated by reference
    in Section 225.140, “d”
    is, for
    each
    data
    point, the difference between
    the average mercury concentration value
    (in
    jig/rn
    3)
    from
    the
    paired
    Ontario Hydro or Method 29 in appendix A-8 to 40
    CFR 60 sampling trains and the
    concentration
    measured
    by
    the monitoring system. For sorbent trap
    monitoring systems, use the
    average
    mercury
    concentration measured
    by the paired traps in the calculation of
    “d”.
    7.4.2 Standard Deviation
    Calculate
    the standard
    deviation,
    Sd,
    of the
    data set using Equation A-8.
    7.4.3 Confidence
    Coefficient
    Calculate the confidence coefficient, cc, of the data set using
    Equation
    A-9.
    7.4.4 Bias Test
    If, for the relative accuracy
    test audit data set being
    tested, the mean difference,
    d, is
    less
    than
    or
    equal to the
    absolute value of the confidence coefficient,
    cc(, the monitor or monitoring
    system
    has
    passed the bias test. If the
    mean
    difference, d,
    is greater than the absolute
    value of the
    confidence
    coefficient,
    jcc(.
    the monitor or monitoring system has failed to meet
    the bias test
    requirement.
    7.5
    Reference Flow-to-Load
    Ratio
    or Gross Heat
    Rate
    (a)
    Except as provided in Section 7.6 of
    this Exhibit,
    the owner or operator
    must determine
    R
    reference
    value
    of
    the ratio of flow rate to unit load,
    each time that a passing
    flow
    RATA
    is
    performed at a load
    level
    designated
    as normal in
    Section 6.5.2.1 of this Exhibit.
    The
    owner
    or
    operator must
    report
    the
    current
    value of
    Rrej
    in
    the electronic quarterly
    report
    required
    under
    40
    CFR
    75.64, incorporated by
    reference
    in Section 225.140, and
    must also report
    the
    completion
    date
    of
    the associated RATA. If two
    load
    levels have
    been designated
    as normal under Section
    6.5.2.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    the owner or
    operator must determine a
    separate R value for
    each of the
    normal
    load
    36

    levels.
    The
    referenccflowto-ioad
    ratio
    must’becaiulated
    as
    follows:
    Rref
    =—-xi0
    (Equation
    A-13)
    avg
    where,
    Rrej
    =
    Reference
    value
    of
    the
    flow-to-load
    ratio,
    from
    the
    most
    recent
    normal-load
    flow
    RATA,
    scfh/megawatts,
    scfhJl000
    lb/hr
    of
    steam,
    or
    scfh/
    (mmBtu/hr
    of
    steam
    output).
    Qrei
    Average
    stack
    gas volumetric
    flow
    rate
    measured
    by
    the
    reference
    method
    during
    the
    normal-
    load
    RATA,
    scth.
    Lava
    =
    Average
    unit load
    during
    the
    normal-load
    flow
    RATA,
    megawatts,
    1000
    lb/hr
    of
    steam,
    or
    mBtuJhr
    of
    thermal
    output.
    (b)
    In
    Equation
    A-13,
    for
    a
    common
    stack,
    determine
    Lavg
    by
    summing,
    for
    each
    RATA
    run,
    the
    operating
    loads
    of
    all
    units
    discharging
    through
    the
    common
    stack,
    and
    then
    taking
    the
    arithmetic
    average
    of
    the
    summed
    loads.
    For
    a
    unit
    that
    discharges
    its
    emissions
    through
    multiple
    stacks,
    either
    determine
    a
    single
    value
    of
    for
    the
    unit
    or
    a separate
    value
    of
    Qrej
    for
    each
    stack.
    In
    the
    former
    case, calculate
    Qr
    by
    summing,
    for
    each
    RATA
    run,
    the
    volumetric
    flow
    rates
    through
    the
    individual
    stacks
    and
    then taking
    the
    arithmetic
    average
    of
    the
    summed
    RATA
    run
    flow
    rates.
    In
    the
    latter
    case, calculate
    the value
    of
    Qrej
    for
    each
    stack
    by
    taking
    the
    arithmetic
    average,
    for
    all
    RATA
    runs,
    of
    the
    flow rates
    through
    the
    stack.
    For
    a
    unit
    with
    a
    multiple
    stack
    discharge
    configuration
    consisting
    of
    a
    main
    stack
    and
    a
    bypass
    stack
    (e.g.,
    a
    unit
    with
    a
    wet
    S_Q
    2
    scrubber),
    determine
    Qrej
    separately
    for
    each stack
    at
    the
    time
    of
    the
    normal
    load
    flow
    RATA.
    Round
    off the
    value
    of
    Rref
    -
    two decimal
    places.
    (c)
    In
    addition
    to
    determining
    Rrej
    or
    as
    an
    alternative
    to
    determine
    Rref
    a
    reference
    value
    of
    the
    gross
    heat rate
    (GHR)
    may
    be
    determined.
    In
    order
    to
    use this
    option,
    quality
    assured
    diluent
    gas
    (CO
    2
    or
    02)
    must
    be
    available
    for
    each
    hour
    of
    the
    most
    recent
    normal-load
    flow
    RATA.
    The
    reference
    value
    of
    the
    GHR
    must
    be
    determined
    as
    follows:
    (Heatlnput)oyg
    (GHR)rej
    =
    xl000
    (Equation
    A-13a)
    avg
    where,
    37

    (GHR)ref
    = Reference value
    of
    the
    gross heat, rate at the time of the most recent.
    normaL-load,
    flow
    RATA,
    Btu!kwh, Btu/lb steam
    load, or Btu heat input/mmBtu steam output.
    (HeatInput)vg
    = Average
    hourly
    heat input during the normal-load flow
    RATA, as
    determined
    using
    the
    applicable
    equation
    in Exhibit
    C
    to
    this Appendix, mmBtuJhr. For multiple stack
    configurations,
    if
    the reference GHR value is determined
    separately
    for each stack, use the hourly
    heat
    input
    measured
    at each stack.
    If
    the reference GHR is determined
    at the unit level, sum the
    hourly
    heat
    inputs measured at the individual stacks.
    Average unit load during the
    normal-load flow RATA, megawatts, 1000
    lb/hr of
    steam,
    or
    mmBtu/hr thermal output.
    (d)
    In the calculation of
    (Heatlnput)avg,
    use
    Qrej’
    the average
    volumetric flow rate
    measured
    by
    the
    reference method during the RATA, and
    use the average diluent gas concentration
    measured
    ‘during
    the flow RATA (i.e., the arithmetic average of the diluent
    gas concentrations for all
    clock
    hours
    in
    which a RATA run was performed).
    7.6
    Flow-to-Load
    Test Exemptions
    (a)
    For
    complex
    stack configurations
    (e.g.,
    when
    the effluent from a unit is divided
    and
    discharges
    through
    multiple stacks in such a manner that
    the flow rate in the individual stacks
    cannot
    be
    correlated
    with unit
    load),
    the owner or operator may
    petition the USEPA under
    40
    CFR
    75.66,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in Section 225.140,.for an
    exemption from the.requirements
    of
    Section 7.7
    to
    Appendix A to
    40
    CFR Part 75 and Section 2.2.5 of Exhibit B
    to
    Appendix
    B. The
    petition must
    include
    sufficient
    information
    and
    data to demonstrate that a flow-to-load
    or gross
    heat rate
    evaluation is
    infeasible for the complex stack configuration.
    (b)
    Units that do
    not produce electrical output
    (in
    megawatts) or thermal output
    (in klb of
    steam
    per
    hour)
    are
    exempted from the flow-to-load ratio test requirements
    of Section 7.5 of this
    Exhibit
    and
    Section 2.2.5 of
    Exhibit B to Appendix
    B.
    Figures for Exhibit
    A to Appendix B
    Figure l.--Linearity
    Error Determination
    Day
    Date
    and
    Reference
    Monitor
    Difference
    Percent
    of
    time
    value
    value
    reference
    value
    Low-level:
    38

    Mid-level:
    High-level:
    Figure
    2.--Relative
    Accuracy
    Determination
    (Pollutant
    Concentration
    Monitors)
    S02
    (ppm
    [FNcJ)
    C02
    (Pollutant)
    (ppm
    [FNc])
    Date
    Date
    Run
    and
    RM
    [FNa]
    M
    [FNb)
    Diff
    and
    RM
    [FNa)
    M
    [FNb]
    Diff
    No.
    time
    time
    1.
    2
    3
    4
    5
    S
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    39

    H
    ‘I
    I’I
    ‘I
    ‘I
    ‘I
    I
    ,.—.,——...—__—,I
    I
    xj
    I-
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    ()
    I
    F-a-
    Di
    —H-
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    II
    I
    I
    I
    I
    ObDi
    I
    0
    I
    I:xj
    ii-
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    -“--i
    I
    I
    —l
    I
    I
    I
    I
    1
    I
    I
    I
    r-i-pitj
    I
    I
    il-i
    I
    —s
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H-iDi
    I
    CD
    Di
    I
    CD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    SOct
    Di
    :
    I
    cCI
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    CD
    1
    CD
    I
    I
    CDrtI
    CD
    I
    I
    OH-
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    CDCD
    I
    I
    WOO
    I
    I
    I
    I
    DiCD
    I
    I
    t-3
    H
    0
    I
    W
    I
    I
    I
    j
    I
    I
    H
    I
    xj
    xj
    rJ
    Cl)
    I
    —-
    I
    I
    Li
    H,Z
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H-
    Cl)
    Di
    I
    (DCD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    .—ij
    iQ
    Cl)
    I
    çt
    i
    I
    zJ
    h
    I
    H-CD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    Cl)
    H
    Cl)
    ‘OH-
    I
    CD
    CD
    I.
    Di
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    001
    I-
    CD
    000
    H
    I
    CD
    CD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    CD
    I()
    CD
    Di
    rti
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    —.
    I
    i•t
    I
    Ct
    I
    I
    DiQ
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    3I-
    1W
    I
    I
    H-
    CD
    lirtCDHl
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    Di
    i
    CDH-i-tii
    DiH-Pl
    I
    I
    I
    OH-
    H,
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    —ct
    I
    I
    cl-CD
    C)
    0
    I
    CD
    oH,
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    CUi
    I
    O
    h
    I
    H-
    I
    I
    I.
    CD
    OCD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    ,—,
    I
    I
    CD
    d
    I
    I
    CD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    j—
    I
    CD
    I
    —H-
    I
    IC)
    Di
    H,CD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H
    DiC)O
    I
    L’IrtH,I
    in
    I
    flH,
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    Di0
    Dl
    DiCD
    H,I
    I
    OH-C)
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H-
    I
    I
    rt
    ct
    —CD
    I
    i-
    I
    OCD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H,
    I
    H-
    Di
    ID)
    I
    I-I
    H-
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H,
    I
    I
    <
    .
    CD
    CD
    I
    IC)
    I
    Di
    CD—
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I.
    I
    CD
    Ct
    I
    I.
    iik<
    1
    I
    C)
    11j
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H
    0
    I
    Dii
    (1-
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    D)
    Di
    01
    0D)CD
    I
    d
    rt
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H-iDi
    C)
    Ct
    p.
    i
    lCD
    Di
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    C1çt
    I()
    Di
    I.
    W-
    I
    1
    ft
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    CD
    CD
    I
    I
    —1xj
    I
    lCD
    Di
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    h
    Di
    Dii
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    Qi
    Cl-i
    I
    CD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H
    IC)
    CD
    Dii
    I
    I
    H-
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    —01
    I
    CD
    I
    I
    i
    01
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    ID)
    I
    0
    I
    Hi
    I
    Di
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    IC)
    I
    tj
    I
    Di—i
    I
    I
    Cf
    i
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H,i-
    I
    CD
    I
    rt—
    I
    H-
    Di
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    —QI
    I
    ft
    Di
    I
    H-•
    I
    10
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    CD
    I
    I
    I
    ()
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I-jCD
    I
    l-
    ()
    I
    CD
    I
    0
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    0
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    H-
    i
    I
    Cl)
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    ,—,
    I
    j
    Cl)
    i
    I
    iQ
    H-i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I-rIO
    i
    Di
    H-
    I
    I
    >I
    Cl)
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    il-
    Cl)
    i
    I
    —.
    i-I-
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H-
    I
    Di
    I
    H-
    dl-
    I
    j
    CD
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H,
    I
    —Di
    10
    CD
    I
    I
    H-
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H,
    I
    HI
    i
    I
    I
    I
    H
    i—i—
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i—i—
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I_-_
    I
    I
    I
    CD
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    CtDid
    I
    I-ij
    I
    I
    I
    Di
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H-IDi
    I
    H
    Di
    i
    I
    Cf
    C))
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    10
    CI)
    i
    I
    I
    H-I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    CD
    CD
    I
    H-
    I
    I
    I(
    di)
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    Ci)
    I
    I
    0
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    -
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    10
    I
    I
    CD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i.,
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I-ri
    i
    i
    CD
    I
    I
    H-
    H-I
    I
    I
    I
    I,
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    —H
    I
    H-
    H-
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    CI)
    01
    ft
    dl-
    I
    I
    I
    CD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    IC)
    10
    Z
    I
    I
    I
    1
    CDI
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H,
    I-
    CD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    ID)
    II
    I
    I
    it!)
    I.
    I
    I
    I
    I;
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    JQl
    I
    I
    I
    I<
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    Cf
    I
    I
    I
    I
    C))
    CD
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    —CD
    I
    CD
    I
    I
    I
    i—•i—
    i—•i—
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    (—t•
    I
    I
    I
    CD
    I
    I
    I
    I.
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    —,_——_
    I
    I
    I
    0
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    0
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H-i
    F-
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    i
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    Di
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    4
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H-
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I—
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I,
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H,
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    H,
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    I
    C

    Reference
    method
    data
    NOX
    system
    (lb/rnmBtu)
    Run
    No.
    Date
    and
    time
    NOX(
    )
    [ENa]
    02/C02%
    RM
    M
    Difference
    1
    2
    3
    4
    5
    6
    7
    8
    9
    10
    11
    12
    Arithmetic
    Mean
    Difference
    (Eq.
    A-7).
    Confidence
    Coefficient
    (Eq.
    A-9)
    .
    Relative
    Accuracy
    (Eq.
    A-b)
    [FNa]
    Specify
    units:
    ppm,
    lb/dscf,
    mg/dscm.
    Figure
    5--Cycle
    Time
    Date
    of
    test
    Component/system
    ID#:
    Analyzer type
    Serial
    Number
    High
    level gas
    concentration:
    ppm!%
    (circle
    one)
    Zero
    level
    gas
    concentration:
    ppml%
    (circle
    one)
    Analyzer
    span
    setting:
    ppml%
    (circle
    one)
    41

    Upscale:
    Stable starting monitor value:
    ppml% (circle
    one)
    Stable
    ending
    monitor reading:
    ppml% (circle
    one)
    Elapsed time:
    seconds
    Downscale:
    Stable starting monitor value:
    ppml%
    (circle one)
    Stable ending monitor
    value:
    ppml%
    (circle
    one)
    Elapsed
    time:
    seconds
    Component cycle time=
    seconds
    System cycle
    time=:
    seconds
    A.
    To determine the upscale cycle time (Figure
    6a),
    measure
    the flue gas emissions
    until
    the
    response stabilizes. Record the stabilized value
    (see
    Section 6.4
    of this Exhibit for
    the
    stability
    criteria).
    B.
    Ihject a high-level
    calibration
    gas into the port leading to the calibration
    cell or thimble
    (Point
    B).
    Allow the analyzer to
    stabilize.
    Record
    the stabilized
    value.
    C.
    Determine the step change. The step change is equal
    to
    the
    difference between
    the
    final
    stable
    calibration gas value
    (Point
    D)
    and the stabilized stack emissions value
    (Point
    A).
    D. Take 95%
    of the step change value and add the result to the
    stabilized stack
    emissions
    value
    (Point
    A).
    Determine
    the time at which
    95% of the step change occurred
    (Point C).
    E. Calculate
    the upscale cycle time by subtracting the time at which
    the calibration
    gas was
    injected
    (Point
    B)
    from the time at
    which
    95% of the step change occurred
    (Point
    C).
    In this
    example,
    upscale
    cycle
    time
    = (11-5)
    = 6
    minutes.
    F. To
    determine the
    downscale
    cycle
    time (Figure 6b) repeat the procedures
    above, except
    that
    a zero
    gas is
    injected when
    the
    flue gas emissions have stabilized,
    and
    95% of the
    step
    change
    in
    concentration is
    subtracted from
    the
    stabilized
    stack emissions value.
    G.
    Compare
    the upscale and downscale cycle time values. The
    longer of these two
    times is
    the
    cycle
    time for
    the analyzer.
    42

    Exhibit
    B
    to
    Appendix
    B--Quality
    Assurance
    and
    Quality
    Control
    Procedures
    1.
    Quality
    Assurance/Quality
    Control
    Program
    Develop
    and
    implement
    a
    quality
    assurance/quality
    control
    (OAIQC)
    program
    for
    the
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    systems,
    and
    their
    components.
    At
    a
    minimum,
    include
    in
    each
    QA/OC
    program
    a
    written
    plan
    that
    describes
    in
    detail
    (or
    that
    refers
    to
    separate
    documents
    containing)
    complete,
    step-by-step
    procedures
    and
    operations
    for
    each
    of
    the
    following
    activities.
    Upon
    request
    from
    regulatory
    authorities,
    the
    source
    must
    make
    all
    procedures,
    maintenance
    records,
    and
    ancillary
    supporting
    documentation
    from
    the
    manufacturer
    (e.g..
    software
    coefficients
    and
    troubleshooting
    diagrams)
    available
    for
    review
    during
    an
    audit.
    Electronic
    storage
    of
    the
    information
    in
    the
    QA/OC
    plan
    is
    permissible,
    providedthat
    the
    information
    can
    be
    made
    available
    in
    hardcopy
    upon
    request
    during
    an
    audit.
    1.1
    Requirements
    for
    All
    Monitoring
    Systems
    1.1.1
    Preventive
    Maintenance
    Keep
    a
    written
    record
    of
    proc1r’
    m--cr
    vstem
    inpp
    ow-kg
    condition
    and
    a
    schedule
    for
    those
    procedures.
    This
    must,
    at
    a
    minimum,
    inciuue
    u
    cedures
    specified
    by
    the
    manufacturers
    of
    the
    equipment
    and,
    if
    applicable,
    additional
    or
    alternate
    procedures
    developed
    for
    the
    equipment.
    1.1.2
    Recordkeeping
    and
    Reporting
    Keep
    a
    written
    record
    describing
    procedures
    that
    will
    be
    used
    to
    implement
    the
    recordkeeping
    and
    reporting
    requirements
    in
    subparts
    E
    and
    G
    of
    40
    CFR
    75,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    and
    Sections
    1.10
    through
    1.13
    of
    Appendix
    B,
    as
    applicable.
    1.1.3
    Maintenance
    Records
    Keep
    a
    record
    of
    all
    testing,
    maintenance,
    or
    repair
    activities
    performed
    on
    any
    monitoring
    system
    or
    43

    component
    in a location
    and fàrmat
    suitable
    for
    inspectiom
    A
    maintenance
    log
    may
    be
    used•
    fOr
    this
    purpose. The
    following records should
    be
    maintained:
    date, time,
    and
    description
    of any
    testing,
    adjustment,
    repair,
    replacement,
    or preventive maintenance
    action
    performed on any
    monitojpg
    system
    and records of
    any
    corrective actions associated
    with
    a monitor’s outage
    period.
    Additionally,
    any adjustment that
    recharacterizes
    a system’s
    ability
    to record and report
    emissions
    data
    must
    be
    recorded
    (e.g.,
    changing
    of flowmonitor
    or
    moisture
    monitoring
    system
    polynomial
    coefficients,
    K
    factors or mathematical
    algorithms,
    changing
    of temperature and pressure
    coefficients
    and
    dilution
    ratio settings),
    and a written
    explanation of the procedures
    used
    to make the adjustment(s)
    must
    be
    kept.
    1.1.4
    0
    The
    requirements in
    Section 6.1.2
    of Exhibit A
    to this Appendix must
    be met by
    any Air
    Emissions
    Testing
    Body
    (AETB)
    performing
    the semiannual/annual
    RATAs
    described in Section
    2.3
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    and the
    mercury emission
    tests
    described
    in Sections
    1.15(c)
    and 1.1
    5(d)(4)
    of
    Appendix
    B.
    1.2 Specific
    Requirements
    for Continuous
    Emissions
    Monitoring
    Systems
    1.2.1 Calibration
    Error
    Test and Linearity
    Check Procedures
    Keep
    a
    written record
    of the procedures
    used for daily calibration
    error
    tests and
    linearity
    checks
    (e.g.,
    how. gases
    are to be
    injected,
    adjustments of flow
    rates
    and
    pressure,
    introduction
    of
    reference
    values,
    length
    of time for injection
    of calibration gases,
    steps for obtaining
    calibration
    error
    or error
    in
    linearity,
    determination
    of interferences, and
    when calibration
    adjustments
    should
    be
    made).
    Identify any calibration
    error test and linearity
    check procedures
    specific
    to the
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring system
    that vary
    from the
    procedures
    in Exhibit A
    to this Appendix.
    1.2.2 Calibration
    and Linearity
    Adjustments
    how each
    wnhinuous ernssion
    rn’iuLoring
    system will
    be
    adjusted
    to
    provide
    cerect
    responses to calibration
    gases,
    reference values, and/or
    indications
    of
    interference
    both
    initially
    and after repairs
    or corrective action.
    Identify
    equations,
    conversion factors
    and
    other
    factors
    affecting
    calibration of
    each continuous
    emission monitoring
    system.
    1.2.3
    Relative Accuracy
    Test Audit
    Procedures
    Keep a
    written
    record
    of procedures
    and details peculiar
    to the installed
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    systems
    that are to be
    used for relative
    accuracy test
    audits, such
    as sampling
    and
    analysis
    methods.
    1.2.4
    Parametric
    Monitoring
    for
    Units With Add-on
    Emission
    Controls
    The
    owner
    or
    operator
    shall keep
    a
    written
    (or
    electronic)
    record including
    a list of
    operating
    44

    parameters
    for
    the
    addLon
    mercury
    emission
    controls,
    as
    applicable,
    and
    the
    range
    of
    each
    operating
    parameter
    that
    indicates
    the
    add-on
    emission
    controls
    are
    operating
    properly.
    The
    owner
    or.
    operator
    shall
    keep
    a
    written
    (or
    electronic)
    record
    of
    the
    parametric
    monitoring
    data
    during
    each
    mercury
    missing
    data
    period.
    1.3
    Requirements
    for
    Sorbent
    Trap
    Monitoring
    Systems
    1.3.1
    Sorbent
    Trap
    Identification
    and
    Tracking
    Include
    procedures
    for
    inscribing
    or
    otherwise
    permanently
    marking
    a
    unique
    identification
    number
    on
    each
    sorbent
    trap,
    for
    tracking
    purposes.
    Keep
    records
    of
    the
    ID
    of
    the
    monitoring
    system
    in
    which
    each
    sorbent
    trap
    is
    used,
    and
    the
    dates
    and
    hours
    of
    each
    mercury
    collection
    period.
    1.3.2
    Monitoring
    System
    Integrity
    and
    Data
    Quality
    Explain
    the
    procedures
    used
    to
    perform
    the
    leak
    checks
    when
    sorbent
    traps
    are
    placed
    in
    service
    and
    removed
    from
    service.
    Also
    explain
    the
    other
    QA
    procedures
    used
    to
    ensure
    system
    integrity
    and
    data
    quality,
    including,
    but
    not
    limited
    to,
    gas
    flow
    meter
    calibrations,
    verification
    of
    moisture
    removal,
    and
    ensuring
    air-tight
    pump
    operation.
    In
    addition,
    the
    QA
    plan
    must
    include
    the
    data
    acceptance
    and
    quality
    control
    criteria
    in
    Section
    8
    of
    Exhibit
    D
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    All
    reference
    meters
    used
    to
    calibrate
    the
    gas
    flow
    meters
    (e.g.,
    wet
    test
    meters)
    must
    be
    periodically
    recalibrated.
    Annual,
    or
    more
    frequent,
    recalibration
    is
    recommended.
    If
    a
    NIST-traceable
    calibration
    device
    is
    used
    as
    a
    reference
    flow
    meter,
    the
    QA
    plan
    must
    include
    a
    protocol
    for
    ongoing
    maintenance
    and
    periodic
    recalibration
    to
    maintain
    the
    accuracy
    and
    NIST-traceability
    of
    the
    calibrator.
    1.3.3
    Mercury
    Analysis
    Explain
    tn
    jjp
    of
    custod
    ‘mployed
    in
    packing,
    transporting,
    and
    anai,
    sorbent
    traps
    (see
    Sections
    7
    2
    “hit
    D
    to
    th
    1
    \ppendix)
    Keepre”
    analyses
    must
    be
    performed
    in
    acco
    1
    *he
    uescnbed
    in
    Section
    i
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    1.3.4
    Laboratory
    Certification
    The
    QA
    Plan
    must
    include
    documentation
    that
    the
    laboratory
    performing
    the
    analyses
    on
    the
    carbon
    sorbent
    traps
    is
    certified
    by
    the
    International
    Organization
    for
    Standardization
    (ISO)
    to
    have
    a
    proficiency
    that
    meets
    the
    requirements
    of
    ISO
    17025.
    Alternatively,
    if
    the
    laboratory
    performs
    the
    spike
    recovery
    study
    described
    in
    Section
    10.3
    of
    Exhibit
    D
    to
    this
    Appendix
    and
    repeats
    that
    procedure
    annually,
    ISO
    certification
    is
    not
    required.
    1.3.5
    Data
    Collection
    Period
    45

    State,
    and
    provide
    the
    rationale
    ‘for, th&mirthnum
    ácceptabl’
    data collection
    ‘period
    (e.g.,
    one
    day,
    one week,
    etc.)
    for the size of sorbent
    trap selected
    for the
    monitoring.
    Include
    in
    the
    discussion
    such
    factors as
    the mercury concentration
    in the
    stack gas, the capacity
    of the
    sorbent
    trap,
    and
    the
    minimum
    mass of mercury
    requited
    forthe
    analysis’..
    1.3.6 Relative’
    Accuracy
    Test
    Audit Procedures
    Keep records
    of the procedures
    and details peculiar
    to the sorbent
    trap monitoring
    systems
    that
    are to
    be followed
    for relative accuracy
    test audits, such
    as sampling
    and analysis methods.
    2. Frequency
    of Testing
    A summary
    chart showing
    each
    quality assurance
    test
    and
    the frequency at
    which
    each
    test
    is
    required
    is located at the end of
    this Exhibit
    in Figure 1.
    2.1 Daily
    Assessments
    Perform
    the following
    daily
    assessments
    to quality-assure
    the hourly
    data
    recorded
    by
    the
    monitoring
    systems during
    each period
    of unit operation, or,
    for
    a
    bypass
    stack or duct,
    each
    period
    in
    which emissions pass
    through the bypass
    stack or duct.
    These requirements
    are effective
    as
    of
    the
    date
    when the monitor
    or continuous emission
    monitoring
    system
    completes
    certification
    testing.
    2.1.1 Calibration
    Error Test
    Except
    as provided in
    Section
    2.1.1.2
    of this
    Exhibit,
    perform
    the
    daily
    calibration
    error
    test
    of
    each
    gas monitoring system
    (including
    moisture
    monitoring
    systems
    consisting
    of wet-
    and
    dry-basis
    02
    analyzers)
    according to
    the procedures in Section
    6.3.1
    of Exhibit A
    to
    this
    Appendix,
    and
    perform
    the daily
    calibration
    error
    test of each flow
    monitoring
    system according
    to the
    procedure
    in
    Section
    6.3.2
    of
    Exhibit
    A to
    \nDendix.
    When two measurement
    ranges
    (jpw and hih are
    guired
    for
    particular
    ‘oient
    calibration
    error
    te
    acnrae
    to
    validate
    the
    data
    r—
    ‘at cange, according
    to the
    2.1.5
    of this
    Exhibit.
    For units with
    add-on emission
    controls
    and
    dual-span or auto-ranging
    monitors,
    and
    other
    units
    that
    use the
    maximum expected
    concentration
    to
    determine
    calibration
    gas values, perform
    the
    daiiy
    calibration error tests
    on each
    scale that
    has
    been used
    since the previous
    calibration
    error
    test.
    For
    example, if the
    pollutant
    concentration
    has not exceeded
    the low-scale
    value
    (based
    on
    the
    maximum
    expected
    concentration)
    since the previous
    calibration
    error test,
    the calibration
    error
    test
    mayjç
    performed
    on the
    low-scale
    only. If, however,
    the
    concentration
    has
    exceeded
    the
    low-scale
    span
    value
    for
    one hour or
    longer
    since
    the
    previous
    calibration
    error
    test,
    perform
    the
    calibration
    error
    test
    on
    both the low-
    and
    high-scales.
    2.1.1.1 On-line
    Daily
    Calibration
    Error Tests.
    46

    Except
    as’
    provided ifi”Section2:L
    I”;2’ofthfs
    E*hibftalT”dáilycalibration
    error
    tests
    must
    be”
    performed
    while
    the
    unit
    is
    in
    operation
    at
    normal,
    stable
    conditions
    (i.e.
    “on-line
    11
    ).
    2.1.1.2
    Off-line
    Daily
    Calibration
    Error
    Tests.
    Daily
    calibrations
    may
    be
    performed’
    while
    theunit
    isnot
    operating
    (i.e.,
    “off-line”)
    and
    may
    be
    used
    to
    validate
    data
    for
    a
    monitoring
    system
    that
    meets
    the
    following
    conditions:
    (1)
    An
    initial
    demonstration
    test
    of
    the
    monitoring
    system
    is
    successfully
    completed
    and
    the
    results
    are
    reportedjn
    the
    quarterly report
    required
    under
    40
    CFR
    75.64,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140.
    The
    initial
    demonstration
    test,
    hereafter
    called
    the
    “off-line
    calibration
    demonstration”,
    consists
    of
    an
    off-line
    calibration
    error
    test
    followed
    by
    an
    on-line
    calibration
    error
    test.
    Both
    the
    off-line
    and
    on-line
    portions
    of
    the
    off-line
    calibration
    demonstration
    must
    meet
    the
    calibration
    error
    performance
    specification
    in
    Section
    3.1
    of
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    Appendix
    B.
    Upon
    completion
    of
    the
    off-line
    portion
    of
    the
    demonstration,
    the
    zero
    and
    upscale
    monitor
    responses
    may
    be
    adjusted,
    but
    only
    toward
    the
    true
    values
    of
    the
    calibration
    gases
    or
    reference
    signals
    used
    to
    perform
    the
    test
    and
    only
    in
    accordance
    with
    the
    routine
    calibration
    adjustment
    procedures
    specified
    in
    the
    quality
    control
    program
    required
    under
    Section
    1
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    Once
    these
    adjustments
    are
    made,
    no further
    adjustments
    may
    be
    made
    to
    the
    monitoring
    system
    until
    after
    completion
    of
    the
    on-line
    portion
    of
    the
    off-line
    calibration
    demonstration.
    Within
    26
    clock
    hours
    of
    the
    completion
    hour
    of
    the
    off-line
    portion
    of
    the
    demonstration,
    the
    monitoring
    system
    must
    successfully
    complete
    the
    first attempted
    calibration
    error
    test, i.e.,
    the
    on-line
    portion
    of
    the
    demonstration.
    (2)
    For
    each
    monitoring
    system
    that has
    passed
    the
    off-line
    calibration
    demonstration,
    off-line
    calibration
    error
    tests
    may
    be
    used
    on
    a
    limited
    basis
    to
    validate
    data,
    in
    accordance
    with
    paragraph
    (2)
    in
    Section
    2.1.5.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    2.1.2
    Daily
    Flow
    Interference
    Check
    Perform
    the
    daily
    flow
    monitor
    interference
    checks
    specified
    in
    Section
    2.2.2.2
    of
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    Appendix
    while
    the
    unit
    is
    in
    operation
    at
    normal,
    stable
    conditions.
    2.1.3
    Addition
    CJi’,ration
    Error
    Tests
    and
    Calibration
    Adjustments
    (a)
    In
    addition
    to
    the
    daily
    calibration
    error
    tests
    required
    under
    Section
    2.1.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    a
    calibration
    error
    test
    of
    a
    monitor
    must
    be
    performed
    in
    accordance
    with
    Section
    2.1.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    as
    follows:
    whenever
    a
    daily
    calibration
    error
    test
    is
    failed
    whenever
    a
    monitoring
    system
    is
    returned
    to
    service
    following
    repair
    or
    corrective
    maintenance
    that
    could
    affect
    the
    monitor’s
    ability
    to
    accurately
    measure
    and
    record
    emissions
    data
    or
    after
    making
    certain
    calibration
    adjustments,
    as
    described
    in
    this
    Section.
    Except
    in
    the case
    of
    the
    routine
    calibration
    adjustments
    described
    in
    this
    Section,
    data
    from the
    monitor
    are
    considered
    invalid
    until
    the
    required
    additional
    calibration
    error
    test
    has
    been
    successfully
    completed.
    -
    47

    (b)
    Routine
    calibrtitrn
    àdj
    tnients’of’anionitor
    are permitted
    ‘after any
    successfül’calibrati’dn
    error
    test. These
    ,routine
    adjustments
    must
    be made
    so
    as to
    bring
    the
    monitor readings
    as
    close
    as
    practicable
    to the kiibwn
    tag
    values of
    the calibration
    gases or to the
    actual
    value of
    the
    flow
    monitor
    reference.
    signals.
    An’
    additiona’icalibration
    error test is required
    following
    routine
    calibration
    adjustments
    where
    the monitor’s
    calibration
    has been physically
    adjusted
    (e.g.,
    by
    turning
    a
    potentiometer)..
    toverify
    that.
    the
    adiustments.have’
    :been’
    made’
    properly.
    An additional
    calibration
    error
    test
    is
    not required,
    however,
    if
    the routine
    calibration
    adjustments
    are made
    by
    means
    of
    a
    mathematical
    algorithm
    programmed
    into
    the
    data
    acquisition
    and handling
    system. It
    is
    recommended
    that routine
    calibration
    adjustments
    be
    made,
    at
    a minimum,
    whenever
    the
    daily
    calibration
    error
    exceeds
    the limits
    of the
    applicable
    performance
    specification in
    Exhibit
    A to
    this
    Appendix
    for the pollutant
    concentration
    monitor,
    2
    CO or
    02
    monitor,
    or flow
    monitor.
    (c)
    Additional
    (non-routine)
    calibration
    adjustments
    of a
    monitor
    are
    permitted
    prior
    to
    (but
    not
    during)
    linearity
    checks
    and RATAs
    and at other
    times, provided
    that
    an appropriate
    technical
    justification
    is included in
    the quality
    control
    program
    required
    under Section 1 of this
    Exhibit.
    The
    allowable
    non-routine
    adjustments
    are
    as follows.
    The owner or operator
    may physically
    adjust
    the
    calibration
    of a monitor
    (e.g.,
    by means
    of a potentiometer),
    provided
    that
    the
    post-adjustment
    zero
    and
    upscale
    responses
    of the monitor
    are within
    the performance
    specifications
    of
    the
    instrument
    given
    in Section
    3 1 of Exhibit
    A to this Appendix
    An additional
    calibration
    error
    test
    is
    required
    following
    such
    adjustments
    to
    verify
    that the
    monitor
    is operating
    within the
    performance
    specifications
    at both
    the zero
    and upscale
    calibration
    levels.
    2.1.4
    Data Validation
    (a)
    An out-of-control
    period
    occurs
    when the
    calibration
    error
    of a
    CO
    2
    or
    02
    monitor
    (including
    02
    monitors used to
    measure
    CO2
    emissions or
    percent
    moisture)
    exceeds
    1.0
    percent
    CO
    2
    or
    0,.
    when the calibration
    error
    of a flow
    monitor or
    a
    moisture
    sensor exceeds
    6.0 percent
    of the
    span
    value,
    which
    is
    twice
    the
    applicable
    specification
    of Exhibit
    A to this Appendix.
    Notwithstanding,
    a
    differential pressure-type
    flow
    monitor for which
    the calibration
    error
    exceeds
    6.0
    percent of
    the
    span
    value will not be considered
    out-of-control
    if
    — Al,
    the
    absolute
    value
    of the
    difference
    between the monitor
    response and
    the reference
    value in Equation
    A-6
    of
    Exhibit
    A to
    this
    Appendix, is
    <
    0.02 inches
    of water.
    For
    a mercury
    monitor,
    an out-of-control
    period
    occurs
    when
    the
    calibration error
    exceeds
    5.0%
    of the
    span
    value. Notwithstanding,
    the
    mercury
    monitor
    will
    not
    be
    considered
    out-of-control if
    IR — Al
    in
    Equation
    A-6
    does not exceed
    1.0 jig/scm.
    The
    out-of-
    control period
    begins
    upon
    failure
    of the calibration
    error
    test
    and ends
    upon
    completion
    of
    a
    successful
    calibration error test.
    Note,
    that
    if a failed
    calibration,
    corrective
    action,
    and
    successful
    calibration
    error test
    occur
    within the
    same
    hour, emission
    data
    for
    that hour recorded
    by
    the
    monitor
    after
    the successful
    calibration
    error test
    may be
    used for reporting
    purposes,
    provided’
    that
    two
    or
    more
    valid
    readings
    are
    obtained
    as required
    by
    Section 1.2 of
    this
    Appendix.
    Emission
    data
    must
    not
    be reported
    from an
    out-of-control
    monitor.
    (b)
    An
    out-of-control
    period
    also occurs
    whenever
    interference
    of a flow
    monitor
    is
    identified.
    The
    48

    out-of-control
    period
    begins
    with
    the hour
    ofcompletion
    of
    the failed
    interference
    check
    and
    ends
    with
    the
    hour
    of
    completion
    of an
    interference
    check
    that is
    passed.
    2.1.5
    OualityAssurance.ofData
    With
    ReecttoDaily
    Assessments
    When
    a
    monitoring
    system
    passes
    a daily
    assessment
    (i.e.,
    daily
    calibration
    error
    test
    or
    daily
    flow
    interference
    check),
    data from
    that
    monitoring
    system
    are prospectively
    validated
    for
    26
    clock
    hours
    (i.e.,
    24 hours
    plus
    a 2-hour
    grace
    period)
    beginning
    with
    the hour
    in
    which
    the test
    is
    passed,
    unless
    another
    assessment
    (i.e.
    a daily
    calibration
    error test,
    an
    interference
    check
    of
    a flow
    monitor,
    a
    qjiarterly
    linearity
    check,
    a quarterly
    leak
    check,
    or
    a relative
    accuracy
    test
    audit)
    is
    failed
    within
    the
    26-hour
    period.
    2.1.5.1
    Data
    Invalidation
    with
    Respect
    to
    Daily Assessments.
    The
    following
    specific
    rules
    apply
    to the
    invalidation
    of
    data
    with respect
    to daily
    assessments:
    (1)
    Data
    from a
    monitoring
    system
    are invalid,
    beginning
    with
    the
    first
    hour
    following
    the
    expiration
    of a
    26-hour
    data
    validation
    period
    or beginning
    with
    the
    first hour
    following
    the
    expiration
    of
    an
    8-
    hour
    start-up
    grace
    period
    (as
    provided
    under
    Section
    2.1.5.2
    of this
    Exhibit),
    if the
    required
    subsequent
    daily
    assessment
    has
    not
    been conducted.
    (2)
    For
    a
    monitor
    that
    has passed
    the
    off-line
    calibration
    demonstration,
    a
    combination
    of
    on-line
    and
    off-line
    calibration
    error
    tests
    may
    be used
    to
    validate
    data
    from
    the monitor,
    as
    follows.
    For
    a
    particular
    unit
    (or
    stack) operating
    hour,
    data from
    a
    monitor
    may
    be validated
    using
    a
    successful
    off-line
    calibration
    error
    test
    if:
    (a)
    An
    on-line
    calibration
    error
    test
    has been
    passed
    within
    the
    previous
    26 unit
    (or
    stack)
    operating
    hours;
    and
    (b)
    the
    26 clock
    hour data
    validation
    window
    for
    the
    off-line
    calibration
    error
    test has
    not expired.
    If
    either
    of
    these conditions
    is
    not met,
    then
    the
    data
    from
    the
    monitor
    are
    invalid
    with
    respect
    to
    the
    daily
    calibration
    error
    test
    requirement.
    Data
    from
    the
    monitor
    must
    remain
    invalid
    until
    the
    appropriate
    on-line
    or off-line
    calibration
    error
    test
    is
    successfully
    completed
    so that
    both
    conditions
    (a)
    and
    (b)
    are met
    (3)
    For
    units with
    two measurement
    ranges
    (low
    and
    high)
    for
    a
    particular
    parameter,
    when
    separate
    analyzers
    are used
    for the
    low
    and high
    ranges,
    a
    failed
    or expired
    calibration
    on
    one
    of
    the
    ranges
    does not
    affect
    the
    quality-assured
    data
    status
    on
    the other
    range.
    For
    a dual-range
    analyzer
    (i.e.. a
    single
    analyzer
    with two
    measurement
    scales),
    a
    failed
    calibration
    error
    test
    on either
    the
    low
    or
    jjg
    scale
    results
    in
    an out-of-control
    period
    for
    the
    monitor.
    Data
    from
    the
    monitor
    remain
    invalid
    until
    corrective
    actions
    are
    taken
    and “hands-off’
    calibration
    error
    tests
    have
    been
    passed
    on
    both
    ranges.
    However,
    if the
    most
    recent
    calibration
    error
    test on
    the
    high
    scale
    was
    passed
    but has
    expired,
    while
    the low
    scale
    is
    up-to-date
    on
    its calibration
    error
    test
    requirements
    (or
    vice-versa),
    the
    expired
    calibration
    error
    test
    does
    not
    affect
    the
    quality-assured
    status of
    the data
    recorded
    on the
    other
    scale.
    2.1.5.2
    Daily
    Assessment
    Start-Up
    Grace
    Period.
    49

    For
    the iurpose’
    ofquaiity
    assuringdatãwith’respectto
    a
    daii’sassessment
    (i.e;
    adaiiycaiibratiàn
    error
    test or a
    flow interference
    check),
    a start-up
    grace
    period
    may
    apply
    when a
    unit begins
    to
    operate
    after
    a period
    of
    non-operation.
    The start-up
    grace
    period
    for
    a daily
    calibiation
    error
    test
    is
    independent
    of
    the. start-up
    graceperiod
    fora
    dailyflow
    interference;check.
    To
    qualify
    for
    a start-up
    grace
    period for
    a daily
    assessment,
    there
    are
    two
    requirements:
    (1) The
    unit must
    have resumed
    operation
    after
    being in outage
    for 1
    or more
    hours
    (i.e.,
    the
    unit
    must
    be in a
    start-up condition)
    as
    evidenced
    by a change
    in unit
    operating time
    from
    zero
    in
    one
    clock
    hour to
    an
    operating
    time
    greater
    than
    zero
    in the
    next clock
    hour.
    (2)
    For the
    monitoring
    system
    to
    be used to
    validate
    data
    during
    the
    grace period,
    the
    previous
    daily
    assessment
    of the
    same
    kind must
    have
    been
    passed on-line
    within
    26
    clock
    hours prior
    to
    the
    last
    hour
    in which
    the
    unit operated
    before the
    outage.
    In
    addition,
    the
    monitoring
    system
    must
    be
    in-
    control
    with respect
    to
    quarterly
    and
    semi-annual
    or annual
    assessments.
    If both
    of
    the
    above
    conditions
    are
    met, then
    a start-up grace
    period
    of
    up
    to
    8 clock
    hours
    applies,
    beginning
    with
    the
    first hour
    of
    unit
    operation
    following
    the outage.
    During the
    start-up
    grace
    period,
    data
    generated
    by
    the
    monitoring
    system are
    considered
    quality-assured.
    For each
    monitoring
    system,
    a start-up
    grace
    period
    for a calibration
    error
    test
    or
    flow
    interference
    check
    ends
    when
    either:
    (1)
    a
    daily assessment
    of
    the same
    kind
    (i.e.,
    calibration
    error
    test
    or
    flow
    interference
    check)
    is perfonned
    or
    (2)
    8
    clock
    hours have
    elapsed
    (starting
    with the first
    hour
    of
    unit
    operation
    following
    the outage),
    whichever
    occurs
    first.
    2.1.6 Data
    Recording
    Record
    and tabulate
    all calibration
    error
    test data
    according
    to
    month,
    day,
    clock-hour,
    and
    magnitude
    in
    either ppm,
    percent
    volume,
    or scth. Program
    monitors
    that
    automatically
    adjust
    data
    to the
    corrected
    calibration
    values
    (e.g.,
    microprocessor
    control)
    to record
    either:
    (1)
    The
    unadjusted
    concentration
    or
    flow
    rate measured
    in
    the
    calibration
    error
    test
    prior
    to resetting
    the
    calibration,
    or
    (2)
    the magnitude
    of
    any
    adjustment.
    Record the
    following
    applicable
    flow
    monitor
    interference
    check
    data:
    (1)
    Sample
    line/sensing
    port
    pluggage,
    and
    (2) malfunction
    of each RTD,
    transceiver,
    or
    equivalent.
    2.2
    Ouarterly
    Assessments
    For each
    primary
    and redundant
    backup
    monitor
    or
    monitoring
    system,
    perform
    the
    following
    quarterly
    assessments.
    This requirement
    is applies
    as of
    the calendar
    quarter
    following
    the
    calendar
    quarter
    in
    which
    the monitor
    or
    continuous
    emission monitoring
    system
    is provisionally
    certified.
    2.2.1
    Linearity
    Check
    Unless
    a
    particular
    monitor
    (or
    monitoring
    range)
    is exempted
    under
    this
    paragraph
    or under
    Section
    6.2 of
    Exhibit
    A to
    this Appendix,
    perform
    a
    linearity
    check, in
    accordance
    with the
    procedures
    in
    50

    Sectfän
    6.2’ôf’Exhibit
    A’
    to”thi
    Appendix
    for each
    primary
    and
    redunthnt
    backup,
    mercu,
    pollutant
    concentration
    monitor
    and
    each
    primary
    and
    redundant
    backup
    CO
    2
    or
    02
    monitor
    (including
    02
    monitors
    used
    to
    measure
    C0
    2
    emissions’
    or
    to
    continuously
    monitor
    moisture)
    at
    least
    once
    ‘during
    eaelr
    OA
    operating
    quarter,
    as
    defined
    in’
    40
    CFR
    72.2,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140.
    For.
    mercury monitors,
    perform
    the
    linearity
    checks
    using
    elemental
    mercury
    standards.
    Alternatively,
    you’.
    may
    perform
    3-level
    system”
    intety
    checks
    at
    the
    same
    three
    calibration
    gas levels
    (i.e.,
    low,
    mid,
    and
    high),
    using
    a
    NIST-traceable
    source
    of
    oxidized
    mercury.
    If
    you
    choose
    this
    option,
    the
    performance
    specification
    in
    Section
    3.2(c)
    of
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    part
    must
    be
    met
    at
    each
    gas
    level.
    For
    units
    using
    both a
    low
    and
    high
    span
    value,
    a
    linearity
    check
    is
    reqire4.ypjhe
    range(s)
    used.
    to
    record
    and.
    report
    emission
    data
    during
    the
    QA
    operating
    quarter.
    Conduct
    the
    linearity
    checks
    no
    less
    than
    30
    days
    apart,
    to
    the
    extent
    practicable.
    The
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    2.2.3(e) of
    this
    Exhibit
    must
    be
    followed.
    2.2.2
    Leak
    Check
    For
    differential
    pressure
    flow
    monitors,
    perform
    a
    leak
    check
    of
    all
    sample
    lines
    (a
    manual
    check
    is
    acceptable)
    at
    least
    once
    during
    each
    QA
    operating
    quarter.
    For
    this
    test,
    the
    unit
    does
    not
    have
    to
    be
    in
    operation.
    Conduct
    the
    leak
    checks
    no
    less
    than
    30
    days
    apart,
    to
    the
    extent
    practicable.
    If
    a
    leak
    check
    is
    failed,
    follow
    the
    applicable
    data
    validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    2.2.3(g)
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    2.2.3
    Data
    Validation
    (a)
    A
    linearity
    check
    must
    not
    be
    commenced
    if
    the
    monitoring
    system
    is
    operating
    out-of-control
    with’respect
    to
    any
    of
    the
    daily
    or
    semiannual
    quality
    assurance
    assessments
    required
    by
    Sections
    2.1
    and
    2.3
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    or
    with
    respect
    to
    the
    additional
    calibration
    error
    test
    requirements
    in
    Section
    2.1.3
    of
    this”Exhibit.
    (b)
    Each
    required
    linearity
    check
    must
    be
    done
    according
    to
    paragraph
    (b)(1’),
    (b)(2)
    or
    (b)(3)
    of
    this
    Section:
    (1)
    The
    linearity
    check
    may
    be
    done
    “cold,”
    i.e.,
    with
    no
    correctivem’aintenancè,
    -repair,’
    calibration
    adjustments,
    re-linearization
    or
    reprogramming
    of
    the
    monitor
    prior
    to
    the
    test.
    (2)
    The linearity
    check
    may
    be
    done
    after
    performing
    only
    the
    routine
    or
    non-routine
    calibration
    adjustments
    described
    in
    Section
    2.1.3
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    at
    the
    various
    calibration
    gas
    levels
    (zero,
    low,
    mid
    or
    high),
    but no
    other
    corrective
    maintenance,
    repair,
    re-linearization
    or
    reprogramming
    of
    the
    monitor.
    Trial
    gas
    injection
    runs
    may
    be
    performed
    after
    the
    calibration
    adjustments
    and
    additional
    adjustments
    within
    the
    allowable
    limits
    in
    Section
    2.1.3
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    may be
    made
    prior
    to
    the
    linearity
    check,
    as
    necessary,
    to
    optimize
    the
    performance
    of
    the
    monitor.
    The
    trial
    gas
    injections
    need
    not
    be
    reported,
    provided
    that
    they
    meet
    the
    specification
    for
    trial
    gas
    injections in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)(G)(v)
    of
    this
    Appendix.
    However,
    if,
    for
    any
    trial
    injection,
    the specification
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)(G)(v)
    is
    not
    met,
    the
    trial
    injection
    must
    be counted
    as
    an
    aborted
    linearity
    check.
    51

    (3)
    The”liiiearity checkmay
    be’
    dOne ‘a’ftr’repair’
    correctivemaintenance
    or’reprogrammingof
    the
    monitor.
    In this case, the monitor must
    be considered
    out-of-control from
    the hour
    in
    which
    the
    repair, corrective maintenance
    or
    reprogramming
    is commenced until
    the
    linearity
    check
    has
    been
    passed.
    Alternatively,
    the data validatiom
    procedures,
    and :•associated
    timelines
    in
    Sections
    1
    .4(b)(3)(B)
    through
    (I)
    of this Appendix may be followed upon
    completion of the
    necessary
    repair,
    correctivemaintenance,
    or:reprogramming.:Jf
    thepioceduresimSection
    1
    .4(b)(3)
    are
    used,
    the
    words
    “quality
    assurance” apply instead of
    the
    word “recertification”.
    (c) Once
    a
    linearity check
    has
    been commenced,
    the test must
    be
    done
    hands-off.
    That
    is,
    no
    adjustments
    of the monitor are permitted during the linearity
    test period, other
    than
    the
    routine
    calibration
    4justments
    following daily
    calibration error tests, as described
    in Section
    2.1.3
    of this
    Exhibit. If a routine daily calibration error test is performed
    and passed just prior to
    a
    linearity
    test
    (or during a linearity test
    period)
    and a mathematical
    correction factor
    is
    automatically
    applied
    by
    the
    DAHS,
    the correction factor must
    be applied to all subsequent
    data
    recorded by
    the
    monitor,
    including the linearity test data.
    (d)
    If
    a
    daily
    calibration error
    test
    is failed
    during
    a linearity test period, prior
    to completing
    the
    test,
    the
    linearity test must be repeated. Data from the monitor are
    invalidated prospectively
    from
    the
    hour
    of
    the failed calibration error test until the hour of completion of
    a subsequent successful
    calibration
    error test. The
    linearity test
    must
    not be
    commenced until the monitor
    has successfully
    completed
    a
    calibration error
    test.
    (e)
    An
    out-of-control period occurs when a linearity
    test is failed
    (i.e.,
    when
    the error in
    linearity
    at
    any of
    the three concentrations in the quarterly linearity
    check
    (or
    any
    of the six
    concentrations,
    when
    both ranges
    of
    a single analyzer with a dual
    range are
    tested)
    exceeds
    the
    applicable
    specification
    in Section 3.2 of Exhibit Ato this Appendix)
    or
    when
    alinearity
    test is aborted
    due
    to
    a
    problem with the monitor or
    monitoring
    system.
    The
    out-of-control
    period
    begins
    with the
    hour
    of
    the
    failed
    or
    aborted linearity check and ends
    with the hour of completion
    of a satisfactory
    linearity
    check
    following
    corrective action and/or monitor repair, unless
    the
    option
    in
    paragraph
    (b)(3) of this
    Section
    to use the data
    validation
    procedures
    and associated timelines
    in
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)(B)
    through (I) of
    this Appendix has been selected, in which
    case the beginning
    and end
    of the
    out-of-
    control
    period must be determined in accordance with
    Sections
    l.4(b)(3)(G)(i)
    and
    (ii).
    For
    a
    dual-
    range analyzer,
    “hands-off’ linearity checks must
    be
    passed
    on both
    measurement
    scales
    to
    end
    the
    out-of-control
    period.
    (f)
    No more
    than four successive calendar quarters must elapse
    after the
    quarter
    in which
    a
    linearity
    check of a
    monitor or monitoring
    system (or
    range of a
    monitor or monitoring
    system) was
    last
    performed
    without a
    subseguent
    linearity test
    having
    been
    conducted. If
    a linearity test
    has
    not
    been
    completed by
    the end of the fourth calendar
    quarter
    since the
    last
    linearity test,
    then the
    linearity
    test
    must be
    completed within a 168 unit operating hour or
    stack operating
    hour “grace
    period”
    (as
    provided
    in Section 2.2.4
    of
    this
    Exhibit)
    following
    the end
    of the fourth successive
    elapsed
    calendar
    quarter,
    or
    data from the
    CEMS
    (or range)
    will
    become
    invalid.
    52

    (g)
    An
    out-of-control
    period
    alsO
    occurs
    ‘when aflOw
    monitor
    sample
    line
    leak
    is
    detectedThe
    out-
    of-control
    period
    begins
    with
    the
    hour
    of
    the
    failed
    leak
    check
    and
    ends
    with,
    the
    hour
    of
    a
    satisfactory
    leak
    check
    following
    corrective
    action.
    (h)
    For
    each
    monitoring
    ‘system,
    report
    the
    results
    of
    all
    completed’
    and
    partial
    linearity’
    tests
    that
    affect
    data
    validation’
    (i.e.,
    all
    completed,
    passed
    linearity
    checks;
    all
    completed,
    failed
    linearity
    checks; and
    all
    linearity
    checks
    aborted
    due
    to
    a
    problem
    with
    the
    monitor,
    including
    trial
    gas
    injections
    counted
    as
    failed
    test
    attempts
    under
    paragraph
    (b)(2)
    of
    this
    Section
    or
    under
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)(G)(vi) of
    Appendix
    B),
    in
    the
    quarterly
    report
    required
    under
    40
    CFR
    75.64,
    incorporated
    yreference in
    Section
    225
    J40.
    Noj
    empts
    which
    are
    aborted
    or
    invalidated
    ‘due
    to
    problems
    with
    the
    reference
    calibration
    gases
    or
    due
    to
    operational
    problems
    with
    the
    affected
    unit(s)
    need
    not
    be
    reported. Such
    partial
    tests
    do
    not
    affect
    the
    validation
    status
    of
    emission
    data
    recorded
    by
    the
    monitor.
    A
    record
    of
    all
    linearity
    tests,
    trial
    gas
    injections
    and
    test
    attempts
    (whether
    reported
    or
    not)
    must
    be
    kept
    on-site
    as
    part
    of
    the
    official
    test
    log
    for
    each
    monitoring
    system.
    2.2.4
    Linearity
    and
    Leak
    Check
    Grace
    Period
    (a)
    When a required
    linearity
    test
    or
    flow
    monitor
    leak
    check
    has
    not
    been
    completed
    by
    the
    end
    of
    the
    OA
    operating
    quarter
    in
    which
    it
    is
    due
    or
    if,
    due
    to
    infrequent
    operation
    of
    a unit
    or
    infrequent
    use
    of
    a
    required
    high
    range
    of
    a monitor
    or
    monitoring
    system,
    four successive
    calendar
    quarters
    have
    elapsed after
    the
    quarter
    in
    which
    a
    linearity
    check
    of
    a
    monitor
    or
    monitoring
    system
    (or
    range)
    was
    last
    performed
    without
    a
    subsequent
    linearity
    test
    having
    been
    done,
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    has
    a
    grace
    period
    of
    168
    consecutive
    unit
    operating
    hours,
    as
    defined
    in
    40
    CFR
    72.2.
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140
    (or,
    for
    monitors
    installed
    on
    common
    stacks
    orbypass
    stacks,
    168
    consecutive
    stack
    operating
    hours,
    as
    defined
    in
    40
    CFR
    72.2)
    in
    which
    to
    perform
    a
    linearity test
    or
    leak
    check
    of
    that
    monitor
    or
    monitoring
    system
    (or
    range).
    The
    grace
    period
    begins
    with
    the
    first
    unit
    or
    stack
    operating
    hour
    following
    the
    calendar
    quarter
    in
    which
    the
    linearity
    test
    was
    due.
    Data
    validation
    during
    a
    linearity
    or
    leak
    check
    grace
    period
    must
    be
    done
    in
    accordance
    with
    the
    applicable
    provisions
    in
    Section 2.2.3
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    (b)
    If,
    at
    the
    end
    of
    the
    168
    unit
    (or
    stack)
    operating
    hour
    grace
    period,
    the
    required
    linearity
    test
    or
    leak
    check
    has
    not
    been
    completed,
    data
    from
    the
    monitoring
    system
    (or
    range)
    will
    be
    invalid,
    beginning
    with
    the
    first
    unit
    operating
    hour
    following
    the
    expiration
    of
    the
    grace
    period. Data
    from
    the
    monitoring
    system
    (or
    range)
    remain
    invalid
    until
    the
    hour
    of
    completion’
    of
    a
    subsequent
    successful
    hands-off
    linearity
    test
    or
    leak
    check
    of
    the
    monitor
    or
    monitoring
    system
    (or
    range).
    Note
    that
    when
    a
    linearity
    test
    or
    a
    leak
    check
    is conducted
    within
    a
    grace
    period
    for
    the
    purpose
    of
    satisfying
    the
    linearity
    test
    or
    leak
    check requirement
    from
    a previous
    OA
    operating
    quarter,
    the
    results
    of
    that
    linearity
    test
    or
    leak
    check
    may
    only
    be
    used
    to
    meet
    the
    linearity
    check
    or
    leak
    check
    requirement
    of
    the
    previous quarter,
    not
    the
    quarter in
    which
    the
    missed
    linearity test
    or
    leak
    check
    is
    completed.
    2.2.5
    Flow-to-Load
    Ratio
    or
    Gross
    Heat
    Rate
    Evaluation
    53

    (a) Applicability’
    and’
    underSection
    7.8 to
    Appendix
    A to
    40
    CFR Part 75 , the owner or operator must, for each flow
    rate
    monitoring
    system
    installed
    on each unit, common stack or multiple stack, evaluate
    the flow-to-load
    ratio
    quarterly,
    i.e. for each
    QA
    operating
    quarter (asdefinedin;40CFR72.2,
    incorporated
    byreference
    in Section
    225.140).
    At the end of each
    QA
    operating quarter,
    the owner or operator
    must
    use
    EquationB-1
    tocalculatethe.flow-to-ioad:ratio,foreveryhour
    during the quarter in
    which:
    the
    unit
    (or
    combination of units, for a common
    stack)
    operated within
    +-l0.0
    percent
    of
    the
    average
    load during the
    most recent normal-load flow
    RATA; and a quality assured hourly average
    flow
    rate
    was obtained with a certified flow rate monitor. Alternatively,
    for the reasons stated in
    paragraphs
    (c)(i)
    through
    (c)(6):
    of this Section the owner or
    operatormay:
    exclude
    from
    the
    data
    analysis
    certain
    hours
    within
    +-
    10.0 percent of
    Lavg
    and
    may
    calculate
    Rh
    values
    for only the
    remaining
    hours.
    0
    Rh
    =--io-
    (Equation
    B-i)
    where,
    Rh
    = Hourly
    value
    of the flow-to-load ratio, seth/megawatts,
    scfhli 000 lb/hr
    of steam,
    or
    scfhl(mmBtu/hr
    thermal
    output).
    Qh
    = Hourly
    stack gas volumetric flow rate, as measured by the
    flow rate monitor, scth.
    Lh
    Hourly unit load,
    megawatts, 1000 lb/hr
    of
    steam,
    or mmBtu/hr thermal output;
    must
    be
    within
    +
    10.0
    percent of
    Lavg
    during the most recent normal-load flow
    RATA.
    (1)
    In
    Equation
    B-i, the
    owner
    or
    operator
    may use either bias-adjusted flow
    rates or
    unadjusted
    flow rates,
    provided
    that
    all of the ratios are calculated the
    same way. For a common
    stack,
    Lh
    will
    be the
    sum of the
    hourly operating loads of all units that
    discharge through the stack.
    For
    a unit
    that
    discharges
    its
    emissions
    through
    multiple stacks or that
    monitors its emissions
    in
    multiple
    breechings,
    Qh
    will be either the
    combined höürly
    vOlumetric flow rate for
    all of the stacks
    or ducts
    (if
    the test
    is done on a
    unit
    basis)
    or the hourly flow rate
    through each stack
    individually
    (‘if
    the
    test
    is
    performed
    separately for each
    stack)
    For a unit with
    a multiple
    stack
    discharge
    configuration
    consisting
    of a main
    stack
    and
    a
    bypass stack, each of which
    has a certified flow monitor
    (e.g.,
    a
    unit
    with a wet
    SQ
    2
    scrubber),
    calculate the hourly flow-to-load ratios
    separately for each
    stack.
    Round
    off each
    value of
    Rh
    to two decimal places.
    (2)
    Alternatively,
    the owner or
    operator may
    calculate the hourly
    gross
    heat rates
    (G1{R)
    in
    lieu
    of
    54

    the’
    hourly
    flow-to-kad’ratios.
    The’houri’
    GHR’
    must
    ‘be
    ‘determined’
    only
    for
    those
    hours
    in
    which
    quality
    assured
    flow
    rate
    data and
    diluent
    gas
    (QQ
    2
    or
    02)
    concentration
    data are
    both,
    available
    from
    a
    certified
    monitor
    or
    monitoring system
    or
    reference
    method.
    If
    this
    option
    is
    selected,
    calculate
    each’
    hourly
    GHR
    value
    as
    follows:
    (Heatlnput),
    (GHR)h
    =
    x
    1000
    (Equation
    B-la)
    where,
    (GHR)h
    =
    Hourly
    value
    of
    the
    gross
    heat
    rate,
    Btulkwh,
    Btu/lb
    steam
    load,
    or
    1000
    mmBtu
    heat
    input/mmBtu
    thermal
    output.
    (Heatlnput)h
    =
    Hourly
    heat
    input,
    as
    determined
    from
    the
    quality
    assured
    flow
    rate
    and
    diluent
    data,
    using
    the
    applicable
    equation
    in
    Exhibit
    C
    to
    this
    Appendix,
    mmBtu/hr.
    L,,
    =
    Hourly
    unit
    load,
    megawatts,
    1000
    lb/hr
    of
    steam,
    or
    mmBtulhr
    thermal
    output
    must
    be
    within
    +
    10.0
    percent
    of
    Lavg
    during
    the
    most
    recent
    normal-load
    flow
    RATA.
    (3)
    In
    Equation
    B-la,
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    may
    either
    use
    bias-adjusted
    flow
    rates
    or
    unadjusted
    flow
    rates
    in
    the
    calculation
    of
    (Heatlnput)h,
    provided
    that
    all
    of
    the
    heat
    input
    values
    are
    determined
    in
    the
    same
    manner.
    (4)
    The
    owner
    or
    operator
    must
    evaluate
    the
    calculated
    hourly
    flow-to-load
    ratios
    (or
    gross
    heat
    rates)
    as
    follows.
    A
    separate
    data
    analysis
    must
    be
    performed
    for
    each
    primary
    and
    each
    redundant
    backup
    flow
    rate
    monitor
    used
    to
    record
    and
    report
    data
    during
    the
    quarter.
    Each
    analysis
    must
    be
    based
    on
    a
    minimum
    of
    168
    acceptable
    recorded
    hourly
    average
    flow
    rates
    (i.e.,
    at
    loads
    within
    +-
    10
    percent
    of
    La).
    When
    two
    RATA
    load
    levels
    are
    designated
    as
    normal,
    the
    analysis
    must
    be
    performed
    at
    the
    higher
    load
    level,
    unless
    there
    are
    fewer
    than
    168
    acceptable
    data
    points
    available
    at
    that
    load
    level,
    in
    which
    case
    the
    analysis
    must
    be
    performed
    at
    the
    lower
    load
    level.
    If,
    for
    a
    particular
    flow
    monitor,
    fewer
    than
    168
    acceptable
    hourly
    flow-to-load
    ratios
    (or
    GHR
    values)
    are
    available
    at
    any
    of
    the
    load
    levels
    designated
    as
    normal,
    a
    flow-to-load
    (or
    GHR)
    evaluation
    is
    not
    required
    for
    that monitor
    for
    that
    calendar
    quarter.
    (5)
    For each
    flow’
    monitor,
    use Equation
    B-2
    in
    this
    Exhibit
    to
    calculate
    Eh,
    the
    absolute
    percentage
    difference
    between
    each
    hourly
    Rh
    value
    and
    Rrej
    the reference
    value
    of
    the
    flow-to-load
    ratio,
    as
    determined
    in
    accordance
    with
    Section
    7.7
    to
    Appendix
    A
    to
    40
    CFR
    Part
    75.
    Note
    that
    Rrej
    must
    always
    be
    based
    upon
    the
    most
    recent
    normal-load
    RATA,
    even
    if
    that
    RATA
    was
    performed
    in
    the
    55

    caiendar”q’uarter
    be ing
    evaluated.:
    R
    ref
    -R;
    t
    x100
    (EguationcB2.
    Rrej
    where:
    Eh
    = Absolute percentage difference between the
    hourly average
    flow-to-load ratio
    and
    the
    reference valueof the fiow-to-1oad ratio at norn al load.
    Rh
    = The hourly average flow-to-load ratio, for each flow rate recorded at a load level
    within
    +-10.O
    percent of
    Rref
    = The
    reference
    value of the
    flow-to-load ratio from the most recent normal-load
    flow
    RATA,
    determined in accordance with Section 7.7 to Appendix A to 40 CFR Part 75.
    (6)
    Equation B-2 must be used in a consistent manner.
    That is,
    use
    Rref
    and
    Rh
    if the
    flow-to-load
    ratio
    is being
    evaluated, and use
    (GHR)ref
    and
    (GHR)
    h if the gross heat rate is being
    evaluated.
    Finally, calculate
    E. the arithmetic average of all of the hourly
    Eh
    values. The owner
    or
    operator
    must
    report the results of each quarterly flow-to-load
    (or
    gross heat rate) evaluation, as
    determined
    from
    Equation B-2, in the electronic
    quarterly
    report
    required under
    40 CFR 75.64.
    (b)
    Acceptable
    results. The results of a quarterly flow-to-load
    (or
    gross heat
    rate)
    evaluation
    are
    acceptable,
    and
    no
    further action is required, if the calculated
    value
    of Ef is less than
    or equal
    to:
    (1)
    15
    0
    percent if
    for the most recent normal-load flow RATA is
    >=60
    megawatts
    (or
    >=500
    klb/hr of
    steam)
    and
    if
    unadjusted flow rates were used in th& calculations or
    (2)
    10 0
    percent if
    Lavg
    for
    the most recent normal-load flow RATA is
    >=60
    megawatts
    (or
    >=500
    klb/hr
    of steam)
    and
    if
    bias-adjusted
    flow rates were used in the calculations; or
    (3)
    20.0 percent,
    if
    Lavg
    for
    the
    most
    recent
    normal-load flow RATA is <60 megawatts (or <500 klb/hr of
    steam)
    and if
    unadjusted
    flow
    rates were used in
    the
    calculations;
    or
    (4)
    15.0
    percent,
    if
    Layg
    for the most recent
    normal-load
    flow
    RATA
    is
    <60
    megawatts (or <500
    klb/hr of
    steam)
    and if
    bias-adjusted
    flow rates were
    used
    in
    the
    calculations.
    If Ef is above
    these limits, the owner or operator
    must
    either:
    implement
    Option
    1
    in
    Section
    2.2.5.1 of this
    Exhibit:
    or perform a RATA in accordance with
    Option
    2 in Section
    2.2.5.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit:
    or
    re-examine the hourly data used for the
    flow-to-load
    or GHR analysis
    and
    recalculate
    Ef.
    after
    excluding all
    non-representative hourly flow rates. If
    Ef is above these limits,
    the
    owner
    56

    or
    operator
    must
    either:
    implëment’Option
    1
    in
    Section
    2;2.51’OfthiExhibit;perfo
    a
    RATA
    in
    accordance
    with
    Option
    2
    in
    Section 2.2.5.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit;
    or
    (if
    applicable)
    re-examine
    the
    hourly
    data
    used
    for
    the
    flow-to-load
    or
    GHR
    analysis
    and
    recalculate
    E.
    after
    excluding
    all
    non
    representative
    hourly,
    flow
    rates,
    as
    ‘provided
    in
    paraaph
    (c)
    ofthis
    Section.
    (c)
    Recalculation
    of
    E.
    If
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    did
    not
    exclude
    any
    hours
    within
    +-
    10
    percent
    of
    Lavg
    from the
    original
    data
    analysis
    and
    chooses
    to
    recalculate
    E.
    the
    flow
    rates
    for
    the
    following
    hours
    are
    considered
    non-representative
    and
    may
    be
    excluded
    from
    the
    data
    analysis:
    (1)
    Any
    hour
    in
    which
    the
    type
    of
    fuel
    combusted
    was
    different
    from
    the
    fuel
    burned
    during
    the
    most
    recent
    normal-load
    RATA.
    For
    purposes
    of
    this
    determination,
    the
    type
    of
    fuel
    is
    different
    if
    the
    fuel
    is
    in
    a different
    state
    of
    matter
    (i.e.,
    solid,
    liquid,
    or
    gas)
    than
    is
    the
    fuel
    burned
    during
    the
    RATA
    or
    if
    the
    fuel
    is
    a
    different
    classification
    of
    coal
    (e.g.,
    bituminous
    versus
    sub-bituminous).
    Also,
    for
    units
    that
    co-fire
    different
    types
    of
    fuels,
    if
    the
    reference
    RATA
    was
    done
    while
    co-firing,
    then
    hours
    in
    which a
    single
    fuel
    was
    combusted
    may
    be
    excluded
    from the
    data
    analysis
    as
    different
    fuel
    hours
    (and
    vice-versa
    for
    co-fired
    hours,
    if
    the
    reference
    RATA
    was
    done
    while
    combusting
    only
    one
    type
    of
    fuel);
    (2)
    For
    a
    unit
    that
    is
    equipped
    with
    an
    SO
    2
    scrubber
    and
    which
    always
    discharges
    its
    flue
    gases
    to
    the
    atmosphere
    through
    a
    single stack,
    any
    hour
    in
    which
    the
    SO
    2
    scrubber
    was
    bypassed;
    (3)
    Any hour
    in
    which
    “ramping”
    occurred,
    i.e.,
    the
    hourly
    load
    differed
    by
    more
    than
    +-15.0
    percent
    from
    the
    load
    during
    the
    preceding
    hour
    or
    the
    subsequent
    hour;
    (4)
    For
    a
    unit
    with
    a multiple
    stack
    discharge
    configuration
    consisting
    of
    a
    main
    stack
    and
    a
    bypass
    stack,
    any
    hour
    in which the
    flue
    gases
    were
    discharged
    through
    both
    stacks;
    (5)
    If
    a
    normal-load
    flow
    RATA
    was
    performed
    and
    passed
    during
    the
    quarter
    being
    analyzed,
    any
    hour
    prior
    to
    completion
    of
    that
    RATA;
    and
    (6)
    If
    a
    problem
    with
    the
    accuracy
    of the
    flow
    monitor
    was discovered
    during
    the
    quarter
    and
    was
    corrected
    (as
    evidenced
    by
    passing
    the
    abbreviated
    flow-to-load
    test
    in
    Section
    2.2.5.3
    of
    this
    Exhiht.
    ai
    L
    :
    to
    completion
    of
    the
    abbreviated flow-to-load
    test.
    (7)
    After
    identifying
    and
    excluding
    au
    -representative
    hr:rly
    data
    in
    accordance
    with
    paragraphs
    (c)(1)
    through
    (6)
    of
    this
    Section,
    the
    owner
    J:.
    ,
    rvz
    fl,
    remaining
    dacond
    time.
    At
    least
    168 representative
    hourly
    ratios
    or
    GHR
    values
    must
    be
    avaiiaue
    tc
    pertiin
    the
    analysis;
    otherwise,
    the
    flow-to-load
    (or
    GHR)
    analysis
    is
    not
    required
    for
    that
    monitor
    for
    that
    calendar
    quarter.
    (8)
    If,
    after re-analyzing
    the
    data,
    E
    meets the
    applicable
    limit
    in
    paraaph
    (bX1),
    (b)(2),
    b)(3),
    or
    57

    (b)(4)
    of thi
    Sëctiön
    no
    further action
    i
    required:If,
    hbwever
    is still
    above
    the
    apliëabIV
    limit
    data from
    the monitor will
    be declared out-of-control,
    begiing with the first unit
    operating
    hour
    following the
    quarter
    in which
    E
    exceeded the
    applicable
    limit.
    Alternatively,
    if
    a
    probationary
    calibration
    error test is performed and
    passed according to Section 1
    .4(b)(3)(B)
    of this
    Appendix,
    dataVfrom
    the
    rnonitormay
    be
    declared
    condjtjOnallyvaijd
    following the
    quarter
    in
    which
    exceeded the
    applicable
    limit. The
    owner
    or
    operator must then either implement
    Option
    1 in
    Section 2.2.5.1
    of
    this Exhibit
    or
    Option
    2 in Section 2.2.5.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    2.2.5.1
    Option
    1
    Within
    14
    unit
    operating
    days of the end
    of the calendar quarter for which
    the
    value is
    above
    the
    applicable limit, investigate and troubleshoot
    the applicable flow
    monitor(s).
    Evaluate
    the
    results
    of
    each investigation as
    follows:
    (a)
    If the investigation fails to uncover a problem
    with
    the
    flow monitor, a RATA
    must be
    performed
    in accordance with
    Option
    2
    in
    Section 2.2.5.2 of this Exhibit.
    (b)
    If a problem
    with
    the flow
    monitor is identified through the investigation
    (including
    the
    need
    to
    re-linearize
    the monitor by changing
    the polynomial coefficients or
    K
    factor(s)),
    data
    from
    the
    monitor are considered invalid back to
    the first unit operating hour after the
    end of the
    calendar
    quarter for which
    was above the applicable
    limit. If the option to use conditional
    data
    validation
    was
    selected
    under
    Section
    2.2.5(c)(8)
    of this Exhibit, all conditionally
    valid data will
    be
    invalidated,
    back to the first
    unit operating
    hour after the end of the calendar
    quarter
    for which Ef
    was
    above
    the
    applicable
    limit. Corrective actions
    must be
    taken.
    All corrective actions
    (e.g., non-routine
    maintenance, repairs,
    major
    component replacements, re-linearization
    of the monitor,
    etc.) must
    be
    documented in
    the operation and
    maintenance records for the monitor.
    The owner or
    operator
    then
    must
    either complete the abbreviated flow-to-load test
    in Section 2.2.5.3 of this
    Exhibit,
    or, if
    the
    corrective action
    taken has required
    relinearization of the flow monitor,
    must perform
    a
    3-load
    RATA. The
    conditional data validation
    procedures in Section 1
    .4(b)(3)of
    this
    Appendix
    may
    be
    applied to
    the
    3-load
    RATA.
    V
    2.2.5.2Option2
    Perform a
    single-1oaçi
    a’__‘cmated
    iormal under
    Section
    6.5.2.1 of
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this Apoep
    di
    xc.ai
    now morr
    for which E is outside of the applicable limit.
    If the
    RATA
    is
    passed
    hands-off, in accordance with Section 2.3.2(c)
    of
    this Exhibit,
    no further action
    is
    required
    and
    the
    out-of-control
    period
    for the monitor ends at the date and
    hour of completion
    of a
    successful
    RATA,
    unless
    the
    option to use conditional
    data validation was selected under
    Section
    2.2.5(c)(8)
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    In
    that case, all
    conditionally
    valid data from
    the
    monitor are considered
    to
    be
    quality
    58

    assured,
    lack tothe
    fitt
    tmitoperatinghôur
    1Toing
    thea
    thddfthe
    calendar
    quarter
    fo
    which
    the
    value
    was
    above
    the
    applicable
    limit.
    If
    the
    RATA
    is
    failed,
    all
    data
    from
    the
    monitor
    will
    be
    jyalidated,back.to
    the
    first
    unit
    operating
    hourfollowing:
    the.
    endof
    the
    calendar
    quarter
    for
    which
    theEf
    value
    was
    above
    the
    applicable
    limit.
    Data.
    from
    the
    monitor
    remain
    invalid
    until
    the
    required
    RATA
    has
    been
    passed
    Alternatively,
    following
    a
    failed
    RATA
    and
    corrective
    actions,
    the
    conditional
    data
    validation
    procedures
    of
    Section
    1
    .4(b)(3)
    of
    this
    Appendix
    may
    be
    used
    until
    the
    RATA
    has been
    passed.
    If
    the
    corrective
    actions
    taken
    following
    the
    failed
    RATA
    included
    adjustment
    of
    the polynomial
    coefficients
    or
    K-factor(s)
    of
    the
    flow
    monitor,
    a
    3-level
    RATA
    is
    required,.
    except
    as.
    otherwiçpçcified
    inSection
    21.3.
    of
    his
    Exhibit
    2.2.5.3
    Abbreviated
    Flow-to-Load
    Test
    (a)
    The following
    abbreviated
    flow-to-load
    test
    may
    be
    performed
    after
    any
    documented
    repair,
    component
    replacement,
    or
    other
    corrective
    maintenance
    to
    a
    flow
    monitor
    (except
    for
    changes
    affecting
    the linearity
    of
    the
    flow
    monitor,
    such
    as
    adjusting
    the
    flow
    monitor
    coefficients
    or
    K
    factor(s)) to
    demonstrate
    that
    the
    repair,
    replacement,
    or
    other
    maintenance
    has
    not
    significantly
    affected
    the
    monitor’s
    ability
    to
    accurately
    measure
    the
    stack
    gas
    volumetric
    flow
    rate.
    Data
    from
    the
    monitoring
    system
    are considered
    invalid
    from
    the
    hour
    of
    commencement
    of
    the
    repair,
    replacement,
    or
    maintenance
    until
    either the
    hour
    in
    which
    the
    abbreviated
    flow-to-load
    test
    is
    passed,
    or
    the
    hour in
    which
    a
    probationary
    calibration
    error
    test
    is
    passed
    following
    completion
    of
    the
    repair,
    replacement,
    or
    maintenance
    and
    any
    associated
    adjustments
    to
    the
    monitor
    If
    the
    latter
    option
    is
    selected,
    the
    abbreviated
    flow-to-load
    test
    must
    be
    completed
    within
    168
    unit
    operatjng
    hours
    of
    the probationary
    calibration
    error
    test
    (or,
    for
    peaking
    units,
    within
    30
    unit
    operating
    days,
    if
    that
    is
    less restrictive).
    Data
    from
    the
    monitor
    are
    considered
    to
    be
    conditionally
    valid
    (as
    defined
    in
    40
    CFR
    72.2, incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140),
    beginning
    with
    the
    hour
    of
    the
    probationary
    calibration
    error test.
    (b)
    Operate
    the
    unit(s)
    in
    such
    a
    way
    as
    to
    reproduce,
    as
    closely
    as
    prti,
    the
    exact
    conditions
    at
    the
    time
    of
    the
    most
    recent
    normal-load
    flow
    P
    T.
    iieve
    this,
    it
    is
    recommended
    that
    the
    load be
    held
    constant
    to
    within
    +-
    I
    ent
    of
    the
    average
    load
    during
    the
    RATA
    and
    that
    the
    diluent
    gas
    (CQ
    r0,
    oncentration
    be
    maintained
    within
    +-0.5
    percent
    CQ2
    or
    02
    of
    the
    aveg
    diluent
    concentration
    during
    the
    RATA.
    For
    common
    stacks,
    to
    the
    extent
    practicable,
    use
    the
    same
    combination
    of
    units
    and load
    levels
    that
    were
    used
    during
    the
    RATA.
    When
    the
    process
    parameters
    have
    been set, record
    a
    minimum
    of
    six
    and
    a
    maximum
    of
    12
    consecutive
    hourly
    average
    flow
    rates,
    using
    the
    flow
    monitor(s)
    for
    which
    was
    outside
    the
    applicable
    limit.
    For
    peaking
    units,
    a
    minimum
    of
    three
    and
    a
    maximum
    of
    12.
    consecutive
    hourly
    average
    flow
    rates
    are
    required.
    Also
    record
    the
    corresponding
    hourly
    load values
    and,
    if
    applicable,
    the
    hourly
    diluent
    gas
    concentrations.
    Calculate
    the
    flow-to-load
    ratio
    (or
    GHR)
    for
    each
    hour
    in
    the
    test
    hour
    period,
    using
    Equation
    B-i
    or
    B-la.
    Determine
    Eh
    for
    each
    hourly
    flow-
    to-load
    ratio
    (or
    GRR).
    using
    Equation
    B-2
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    and
    then calculate
    the
    arithmetic
    average
    of
    the
    Eh
    values.
    59

    (c)
    The results of the abbreviated
    flow-to-load test will
    be
    considered
    acceptable,
    and
    no
    further
    action
    is
    required
    if the
    value of
    Eh
    does not exceed the
    applicable limit
    specified
    in
    Section2.2.5
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    All
    éonditionally
    valid
    data
    recorded”by’the
    flow
    monitor will ‘b
    considered
    quality
    assured, beginning with
    the hour of the probationary calibration
    error test that
    preceded
    the
    abbreviated flow-to-load
    test
    (if
    applicable). However,
    if
    is outside the
    applicable
    limit,
    all
    conditionally valid data recorded by the flow
    monitor
    (if
    applicable) will be
    considered
    invalid
    back
    to the hour of the probationary calibration error
    test
    that
    preceded the abbreviated
    flow-to-load
    test,
    in1-load RATAiqpjred
    in accordance with Section 2.2.5.2
    of this Exhibit.
    If
    the
    flow
    monitor must be re-linearized, however, a 3-load
    RATA is required.
    2.3 Semiannual and Annual Assessments
    For
    each
    primary and redundant backup monitoring
    system, perform relative accuracy
    assessments
    either semiannually or
    annually,
    as specified in Section 2.3.1.1
    or
    2.3.1.2
    of this Exhibit
    for
    the
    type
    of test
    and
    the performance
    achieved.
    This requirement applies as of the, calendar
    quarter
    following
    the calendar quarter in which the monitoring system
    is provisionally certified.
    A
    summary
    chart
    showing the frequency with which a relative accuracy test
    audit must be performed,
    depending
    on
    the accuracy
    achieved,
    is
    located
    at the end of this Exhibit in Figure 2.
    2.3.1
    Relative Accuracy Test Audit
    (RATA)
    2.3.1.1
    Standard RATA Frequencies
    (a)
    Except
    for mercury monitoring systems, and
    as otherwise specified in
    Section
    2.3.1.2
    of this
    Exhibit, perform relative accuracy test audits semiannually, i.e.,
    once every
    two
    successive
    QA
    operating
    quarters
    (as
    defined
    in 40 CFR 72.2, incorporated by reference
    in Section
    225.140)
    for
    each
    primary
    and redundant backup flow monitor,
    2
    CO
    or
    02
    diluent monitor
    used to
    determjneheat
    input,
    moisture monitoring
    system.
    F cach mary and redundant
    backup
    mercury
    concentration
    monitoring
    system and
    each
    sorbent trap monitoring sy:tm.
    1AI
    must
    be
    performed
    annually,
    i.e., once
    every four successive
    QA
    operating quarters (as defined
    in 40 CFR 72.2).
    A
    calendar
    quarter
    that does not qualify as a
    QA
    operating
    quarter
    must be excluded in
    determining
    the
    deadline
    for
    the next
    RATA.
    No
    more
    than eight successive calendar
    quarters
    must elapse
    after the
    quarter
    in
    which a RATA
    was last
    performed
    without a subsequent
    RATA having
    been
    conducted. If
    a
    RATA
    has not been
    completed by the end
    of the
    eighth
    calendar quarter
    since the quarter
    of the last
    RATA,
    then the RATA
    must
    be completed
    within a 720 unit
    (or
    stack)
    operating
    hour grace
    period
    (as
    provided in Section
    2.3.3 of this
    Exhibit) following the end of the
    eighth
    successive
    elapsed
    calendar
    quarter, or data
    from the
    CEMS will become invalid.
    (b)
    The relative
    accuracy
    test audit
    frequency of a CEMS may
    be reduced, as
    specified in
    Section
    2.3.1.2 of
    this Exhibit, for primary or redundant
    backup
    monitoring systems
    which
    qualify
    for less
    frequent
    testing.
    Perform all
    required RATAs in accordance
    with the applicable
    procedures
    and
    60

    provisions
    in
    Sëctions
    65
    though6.522
    uf
    :EthibitA:.to.
    this Appendix
    ànd
    Sections
    2:3
    I.3’and
    2.3.1.4
    of
    this Exhibit.
    2.3.1.2
    Reduced
    RATAFrequencies
    Relative
    accuracytest
    auditsofprimary
    and:redundantbackup
    CO
    2
    or
    O
    diluent
    monitors
    used
    to
    determine
    heat
    input,
    moisture
    monitoring
    systems,
    flow
    monitors
    may
    be
    performed
    annually
    (i.e.,
    once
    every
    four
    successive
    OA
    operating
    quarters,
    rather
    than
    once
    every
    two
    successive
    QA
    operating
    quarters)
    if
    any
    of
    the
    following
    conditions
    are
    met
    for
    the
    specific
    monitoring
    system
    involved:
    (a)
    The relative
    accuracy
    during
    the
    audit
    of
    a
    CO
    2
    or
    02
    diluent
    monitor
    used
    to
    determine
    heat
    input
    is
    <=r75
    percent;
    (b)
    The relative
    accuracy
    during
    the
    audit
    of
    a
    flow
    monitor
    is
    <=7.5
    percent
    at
    each
    operating
    level
    tested;
    (c)
    For low
    flow
    (<=10.0
    fbs), as
    measured
    by the
    reference
    method
    during
    the
    RATA
    stacks/ducts,
    when
    the flow
    monitor
    fails
    to
    achieve
    a
    relative
    accuracy
    <7.5
    percent
    during
    the
    audit,
    but
    the
    monitor
    mean
    value,
    calculated
    using
    Equation
    A-7
    in
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    Appendix
    and
    converted
    back
    to
    an
    equivalent
    velocity
    in
    standard
    feet
    per
    second
    (fps),
    is
    within
    +-
    1.5
    fps
    of
    the
    reference
    method
    mean
    value,
    converted
    to
    an
    equivalent
    velocity
    in
    fps;
    (d)
    For
    a
    Q2
    or
    Q2
    monitor,
    when
    the
    mean
    difference
    between
    the
    reference
    method
    values
    from
    the
    RATA
    and
    the
    corresponding
    monitor
    values
    is
    within
    +-
    0.7
    percent
    CO
    2
    or
    O;
    and
    (e)
    When
    the
    relative
    accuracy
    of
    a
    continuous
    moisture
    monitoring
    system
    is
    <=
    7.5
    percent
    or
    when
    the
    mean
    difference
    between
    the reference
    method
    values
    from
    the
    RATA
    and
    the
    corresponding
    monitoring
    system
    values
    is
    within
    +-1.0
    percent
    H0.
    2.3.1.3
    RATA
    Load
    (or
    Operating)
    Levels
    and
    Additional
    RATA
    Requirements
    (a) For
    CO
    2
    oQ
    2
    dilut
    iom
    tots
    u
    determine
    heat
    input,
    mercury
    concentration
    monitoring
    systems,
    sorb ent
    trap
    monitoring
    systems,
    moisnL
    1
    1onitoring
    systems,
    the
    required
    semiannual
    or
    annual
    RATA
    tests
    must•
    be
    done
    at
    the
    load
    level
    (or
    op
    n
    g
    level)
    designated
    as
    normal
    under
    Section
    6.5.2.1(d)
    of
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    If
    two
    load
    .
    -
    (or
    octip1are
    designated
    as
    normal,
    the
    required
    RATA(s)
    may
    be
    done
    at
    either
    load
    level
    (or
    operating
    IL
    1),
    (b) For flow
    monitors
    installed
    and
    bypass
    stacks,
    and
    for
    flow
    monitors
    that
    qualify
    to
    perform
    only
    single-level
    RATAs
    under
    Section
    6.5.2(e)
    of
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    Appendix,
    all
    required
    semiannual
    or
    annual
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audits
    must
    be
    single-load
    (or
    single-level)
    audits
    at
    the
    normal
    load
    (or
    operating
    level),
    as
    defined
    in
    Section
    6.5.2.1(d)
    of
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    61

    (1)
    An annual 2-load
    (or 2-level)
    flow
    RATA must be done at the two most frequently
    used
    load
    levels
    (or
    operating
    levels),
    asdeterminedunder.
    Seotion&5.2.
    1(d)
    of
    Exhi:bitA
    tothis
    Appendix,
    or
    (if applicable)
    at the operating levels
    determined under Section
    6.5.2(e)
    of Exhibit
    A to this
    Appendix.
    Alternatively,.
    a 3-load
    (or•
    mid, and hi
    load
    levels
    (or
    operating
    levels),
    as defined under Section
    6.5.2.1(b)
    of Exhibit A to this
    Appendix,
    may
    be
    performed in lieu of the
    2-load
    (or
    2-level)
    annual
    RATA.
    (2)
    If
    the
    flow monitor is on a semiannual
    RATA frequency, 2-load
    (or
    2-level)
    flow
    RATAs
    and
    single-load (or
    single-level)
    flow RATAs at the normal
    load
    level
    (ornormal
    operating
    level)
    may
    be
    performed alternately.
    (3)
    A single-load (or single-level) annual flow RATA
    may be performed in lieu of the
    2-load
    (or
    2-
    level)
    RATA
    if the results of an historical load
    data analysis show that in the time
    period
    extending
    from the ending date of the last annual flow RATA
    to a date that is no more than 21
    days
    prior
    to
    the
    date
    gf
    the current
    annual
    flow RATA, the unit
    (or
    combination
    of units,
    for a common
    stack)
    has
    operated at a
    single load level
    (or
    operating
    level)
    (low,
    mid, or
    high),
    for
    >=85.0
    percent
    of
    the
    time.
    Alternatively, a flow monitor may qualify
    for a single-load (or single-level)
    RATA
    if
    the
    85.0
    percent
    criterion is met in the time period extending
    from the beginning of the quarter
    in
    which
    the
    last
    annual flow RATA
    was
    performed
    through the end
    of the calendar quarter preceding
    the
    quarter
    of
    current annual
    flow
    RATA.
    (4)
    A 3-load
    (or
    3-level)
    RATA,
    at the low-, mid-, and high-load levels
    (or
    operating
    levels),
    as
    determined
    under Section 6.5.2.1 of Exhibit A
    to this
    Appendix,
    must be
    performed
    at
    least
    once
    every twenty
    consecutive
    calendar quarters, except
    for flow monitors that are
    exempted
    from
    3-load
    (or
    3-level)
    RATA testing under Section
    65.2(b)
    or
    6.5.2(e)
    of Exhibit A to this
    Appendix.
    (5)
    A
    3-load (or
    3-level)
    RATA is
    required whenever
    a flow monitor is re-linearized,
    i.e.,
    when
    its
    polynomial
    coefficients or K
    factor(s)
    are changed, except
    for flow monitors that are
    exempted
    from
    3-load
    (or
    3-level)
    RATA
    testing under Section
    6.5.2(b)
    or
    6.5.2(e)
    of Exhibit A to
    this
    Appçjx.
    For monitors
    so exempted under Section
    6.5.2(b),
    a
    single-load
    flow
    RATA
    uired.
    For
    monitors so
    exempted
    under Section
    6.5.2(e),
    eith
    . :ie-level RAlA
    or a 2-level
    RATA
    is
    required,
    depending on
    the
    number
    of
    oper,
    revels documented in the monitoring
    plan
    for
    the
    unit.
    110W
    audits, the audit points at
    adjacent
    load levels or at
    adjacent
    operating
    levels
    (e.g.,
    mid
    and
    high)
    must be separated by
    no
    less
    than 25.0 percent of the “range
    of
    operation,”
    as
    defined in Section
    6.5.2.1
    of
    Exhibit
    A to this Appendix.
    (d)
    A
    RATA
    of a moisture monitoring
    system must be performed whenever
    the coefficient,
    K
    factor
    or
    mathematical
    algorithm determined under
    Section 6.5.6 of Exhibit A
    to
    this
    Appendix
    is
    changed.
    62

    2.3.1.4
    Number
    ofRATAAttempts
    The owner
    or
    operator
    may
    perform
    as
    many RATA
    attempts
    as are
    necessary
    to achieve
    the
    desired
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audit frequencies
    However,
    the
    data validation
    procedures
    in
    Section
    2;3
    .2 of
    this Exhibit
    must
    be
    followed.
    2.3.2
    Data Validation
    (a) A RATA
    must
    not
    commence
    if the monitoring
    system
    is operating
    out-of-control
    with
    respect
    to
    any of the
    daily
    and
    quarterly
    gglity
    assurance
    ççqjred
    by
    Sections
    2.1
    and
    2.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    or with respect
    to the
    additional
    calibration
    error
    test requirements
    in
    Section
    2.1.3
    of this
    Exhibit.
    (b)
    Each
    required
    RATA
    must
    be done
    according
    to paragraphs
    (b)(1),
    (b)(2)
    or
    (b)(3)
    of this
    Section:
    (1)
    The
    RATA may
    be done
    “cold,
    i.e.,
    with
    no
    corrective
    maintenance,
    repair,
    calibration
    adjustments,
    re-linearization
    or
    reprogramming
    of
    the monitoring
    system
    prior to
    the test.
    (2)
    The
    RATA may
    be
    done
    after performing
    only
    the
    routine
    or non-routine
    calibration
    adjustments
    described
    in Section
    2.1.3 of
    this Exhibit
    at the
    zero and/or
    upscale
    calibration
    gas
    levels,
    but no
    other
    corrective
    maintenance,
    repair,
    re-linearization
    or
    reprogramming
    of
    the
    monitoring
    system.
    Trial
    RATA runs
    may be
    performed
    after
    the calibration
    adjustments
    and
    additional
    adjustments
    within
    the allowable
    limits
    in Section
    2.1.3
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    may
    be
    made
    prior
    to the
    RATA,
    as
    necessary,
    to
    optimize
    the performance
    of
    the CEMS.
    The
    trial RATA
    runs need
    not
    be
    reported,
    provided
    that
    they
    meet
    the
    specification
    for
    trial
    RATA
    runs
    in
    Section
    1.4(b)(3)(G)(v)
    of
    this
    Appendix.
    H
    wever,
    if, for any
    trial
    run,
    the specification
    in Section
    (b)(3)(G)(v)
    ofthis
    Appendix
    is
    not
    met,
    the
    trial
    run
    must be
    counted
    as an aborted
    RATA
    attempt.
    (3)
    The RATA
    may
    be done
    after repair,
    corrective
    maintenance,
    re-linearization
    or reprogramming
    of
    the
    monitoring
    system.
    In
    this case,
    the monitoring
    system
    will
    be considered
    out-of-control
    from
    the
    hour in which
    the repair,
    corrective
    maintenance,
    re-linearization
    or
    reprogramming
    is
    commenced
    until
    the
    RATA
    has been
    passed.
    Alternatively,
    the
    data
    validation
    procedures
    and
    associated
    timelines
    in Sections
    1.4(b)(3)(B)
    through
    (I)
    of this
    Appendix
    may be
    followed
    upon
    completion
    of
    the
    necessary
    repair, corrective
    maintenance,
    re-linearization
    or
    reprogramming.
    If the
    procedures
    in
    Section 1
    .4(b)(3)
    of
    this
    Appendix
    are
    used, the
    words “quality
    assurance”
    apply
    instead of
    the
    word “recertification.”
    (c)
    Once
    a
    RATA
    is
    commenced,
    the test
    must
    be done
    hands-off.
    No
    adjustment
    of
    the
    monitor’s
    calibration
    is
    permitted
    during
    the RATA
    test period,
    other
    than the
    routine
    calibration
    adjustments
    following
    daily
    calibration
    error
    tests,
    as described
    in
    Section 2.1.3
    of this
    Exhibit.
    If a
    routine
    daily
    calibration
    error
    test is performed
    and
    passed
    just prior
    to
    a
    RATA
    (or
    during
    a RATA
    test
    period)
    and a
    mathematical
    correction
    factor
    is automatically
    applied by
    the
    DAHS,
    the
    correction
    factor
    63

    mustbe
    appliedto all subsequentdata recorded
    byth&monitor including the RATA
    test data. For
    2-
    level and 3-
    level flow monitor audits, no linearization or reprogramming of the
    monitor
    is
    permitted
    in between load
    levels..
    (d)
    For
    single-load (or single-level)
    RATAs,
    if a daily calibration error test is failed during
    a
    RATA
    test
    period, prior to. completing the test,
    the RATA must be repeated.
    Data
    from the
    monitor
    are
    invalidated
    prospectively from
    the
    hour of the failed calibration error test until the
    hour
    of
    completion of a
    subsequent successful calibration error test. The subsequent RATA must
    not
    be
    commenced until
    the
    monitor has
    successfully passed
    a
    calibration error test
    in accordance
    with
    Section
    2.1.3 of this Exhibit.
    Notwithstanding these requirements, when ASTM
    D6784-02
    (incorporated
    by
    reference under Section
    225.140) or Method 29 in
    appendix A-8
    to 40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in Section
    225.140, is used as the reference method for the RATA
    of
    a
    mercury CEMS, if
    a calibration error test of the CEMS is failed during
    a RATA test
    period,
    any
    test
    run(s)
    completed
    prior to
    the failed calibration error test need not be
    repeated;
    however, the
    RATA
    may not
    continue until a
    subsequent calibration error test of the mercury CEMS has been
    passed.
    For
    multiple-load
    (or
    multiple-level)
    flow RATAs, each load level (or
    operating
    level)
    is treated
    as a
    separate
    RATA
    (i.e..
    when
    . a
    calibration error.
    test
    is
    failed
    prior. to
    completing
    the RATA
    at
    a
    particular load
    level
    (or
    operating
    level),
    only the RATA at that load level
    (or
    operating level)
    must
    be
    repeated;
    the results of any
    previously-passed
    RATA(s)
    at the other load level(s) (or
    operating
    level(s)) are
    unaffected,
    unless re-linearization of the monitor is required to correct the
    problem
    that
    caused the
    calibration
    failure, in which case a
    subsequent
    3-load (or
    3-level)
    RATA
    is
    required),
    except as
    otherwise
    provided in Section
    2.3.1.3(c)(5)
    of this
    Exhibit.
    (e)
    For a
    RATA
    performed
    using
    the
    option
    in
    paragraph
    (b)(1)
    or
    (b)(2)
    of this
    Section,
    if
    the
    RATA
    is failed
    (that
    is, if the
    relative accuracy
    exceeds the applicable specification in
    Section
    3.3
    of
    Exhibit A to
    this Appendix) or
    if the RATA is aborted prior to completion due to a
    problem
    with
    the
    CEMS,
    then
    the CEMS
    is out-of-control and all emission data from the CEMS are
    invalidated
    prospectively
    from
    the hour in which the RATA is failed or aborted. Data
    from the
    CEMS
    remain
    invalid
    until the
    hour of
    completion of a
    subsequent
    RATA
    that meets
    the applicable specification
    in
    Section
    3.3 of
    ExhibitA to
    this Appendix. If the option in paragraph
    ‘b)(3)
    of this Section
    to use
    the
    data
    validation
    procedures and
    associated
    timelines,,in Sections 1
    .4(b)(3)(B)
    through(b)(3)(Iof
    this
    Appendix
    has
    been selected
    the
    beginmng
    and
    end
    of
    the out-of-control period must
    be determined
    in
    accordance
    with
    Section 1
    .4(b)(3)(G)(i)
    and
    (ii)
    of this Appendix.
    Note
    that
    when
    a
    RATA
    is
    aborted
    for a
    reason other than
    monitoring
    system
    malfunction (see
    paragraph
    (g)
    of
    this
    Section),
    this
    does
    not
    trigger an
    out-of-control period
    for
    the monitoring system.
    (f)
    For a
    2-level
    or 3-level flow
    RATA, if, at any load level
    (or
    operating
    level),
    a RATA
    is
    failed
    or
    aborted
    due to
    a problem with
    the flow monitor, the RATA
    at
    that load level (or operating
    level)
    must be
    repeated
    The flow
    monitor is considered out-of-control and data from the
    monitor
    are
    invalidated
    from
    the hour in
    which the test is failed or aborted and remain invalid until the
    Passing
    of
    a
    RATA
    at
    the failed load
    level
    (or operating
    level),
    unless the option in paragraph
    (b)(3)
    of
    this
    Section
    to
    use the
    data
    validation
    procedures
    and associated timelines in Section 1
    .4(b)(3)(B)
    through
    (b)(3)(I)
    of this
    Appendix has been selected,
    in
    which
    case the
    beginning and
    end
    of
    the
    out
    64

    of-control
    j:erió&’thiist’
    be•
    dëterthih’ed’
    iir
    accordance
    with
    Scti’ön
    i.4(b)(3RG(iT
    and”(ii)’ofthi
    Appendix.
    Flow
    RATA(s)
    that
    were
    previously
    passed
    at
    the
    other
    load
    level(s)
    (or
    operating
    levels(s))
    do
    not
    have
    to
    be
    repeated
    unless
    the
    flow
    monitor
    must
    be
    re-linearized
    following
    the
    failed
    or
    aborted
    test.’
    if
    the
    flow
    monitor
    is.re-linearize& a subsequent
    3-load
    (or3-]evel)
    RATA
    is
    reguired,
    except
    as
    otherwise
    provided
    in
    Section.
    2.3.1
    .3(c)(5)
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    (g)
    For
    each
    monitoring
    system, report
    the
    results
    of all
    completed
    and
    partial
    RATAs
    that
    affect
    data
    validation
    (i.e.,
    all
    completed,
    passed
    RATAs all
    completed,
    failed
    RATAs
    and
    all
    RATAs
    aborted
    due
    to
    a
    problem
    with
    the
    CEMS,
    including
    trial
    RATA
    runs
    counted
    as
    failed
    test
    attempts
    pparagrapj(2)
    of
    this
    Section
    or
    under
    Section 1
    .4(b’)(3)(G)(vi)) in
    the
    quarterly
    report
    required
    under
    40
    CFR
    75.64,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140.
    Note
    that
    RATA
    attempts
    that
    are
    aborted
    or
    invalidated
    due
    ‘to
    problems
    with
    the
    reference
    method
    or
    due
    to
    operational
    problems with
    the
    affected
    unit(s)
    need
    not
    be
    reported.
    Such
    runs
    do
    not
    affect
    the
    validation
    status
    of
    emission
    data
    recorded
    by
    the
    CEMS.
    However,
    a record
    of
    all
    RATAs,
    trial
    RATA runs
    and
    RATA
    attempts
    (whether
    reported
    or
    not)
    must
    be
    kept
    on-site
    as
    part
    of
    the
    official
    test
    log
    for
    each
    monitoring
    system.
    (h)
    Each
    time
    that
    a hands-off
    RATA
    of
    a
    mercury
    concentration
    monitoring
    system,
    a
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system,
    or
    a
    flow
    monitor
    is
    passed, perform
    a bias
    test
    in
    accordance
    with
    Section
    7.4.4
    of Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    (1)
    Failure
    of
    the
    bias
    test
    does
    not
    result
    in
    the
    monitoring
    system
    being
    out-of-control.
    2.3.3
    RATA
    Grace
    Period
    (a)
    The
    owner
    or operator
    hasa
    grace
    period
    of
    720
    consecutive
    unit
    operating
    hours,
    as
    defined
    in
    40
    CFR
    72.2,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140
    (or,
    for
    CEMS installed
    on
    common
    stacks
    or
    bypass
    stacks,
    720
    consecutive
    stack
    operating
    hours,
    as
    defined
    in
    40
    CFR
    72.2),
    in
    which
    to
    complete
    the
    required
    RATA
    for
    a
    particular
    CEMS
    whenever:
    (1)
    A
    required
    RATA
    has
    not
    been
    performed
    by
    the
    end
    of
    the
    OA
    operating
    quarter
    in
    which
    it
    is
    due;or
    (2)
    A
    required 3-load
    flow
    RATA
    has
    not
    been
    performed
    by
    the
    end
    of
    the
    calendar
    quarter
    in
    which
    it
    is
    due.
    f)
    The
    grace
    period
    will
    begin with
    the
    first
    unit
    (or
    stack)
    operating
    hour
    following
    the
    calendar
    quarter
    in
    which the
    required
    RATA
    was
    due.
    Data
    validation
    during
    a
    RATA
    grace
    period
    must
    be
    done
    in
    accordance
    with
    the
    applicable
    provisions
    in Section
    2.3.2
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    (c)
    If,
    at
    the
    end
    of
    the
    720
    unit
    (or
    stack)
    operating
    hour
    grace
    period,
    the
    RATA
    has
    not
    been
    completed,
    data
    from
    the
    monitoring
    system
    will
    be
    invalid,
    beginning
    with
    the
    first
    unit
    operating
    hour following the
    expiration
    of
    the
    grace
    period.
    Data
    from
    the
    CEMS
    remain
    invalid
    until
    the
    hour
    65

    of
    completion
    of a subsequent
    handsoff
    RATA. The
    deadlinefbithe
    next test will
    be
    either
    two
    OA
    operating quarters
    (if
    a semiannual RATA
    frequency
    is
    obtained)
    or four
    QA
    operating
    quarters
    (if
    an annual RATA
    frequency
    is
    obtained)
    after
    the
    quarter
    in
    which the
    RATA
    is
    completed,
    not•
    to
    exceed eight
    calendar
    quarters.
    (d)
    When
    a
    RATA
    is done during
    a grace
    period
    in order
    to satisfy a RATA
    requirement
    from
    a
    previous quarter,
    the
    deadline
    for the next
    RATA
    must
    be
    determined as follows:
    (1) If the
    grace period RATA
    qualifies
    for
    a reduced,
    (i.e.,
    annual),
    RATA
    frequency
    the
    deadline
    for
    the
    next RATA will be
    set at three
    OA
    operating
    quarters
    after the
    quarter in
    which
    the
    grace
    period test
    is completed.
    (2) If the
    grace period RATA
    qualifies
    for
    the
    standard,
    (i.e.,
    semiannual),
    RATA
    frequency
    the
    deadline for the
    next RATA will
    be set at two
    QA
    operating
    quarters
    after
    the quarter
    in
    which
    the
    grace period
    test is completed.
    (3)
    Notwithstanding
    these
    requirements, no
    more than
    eight
    successive
    calendar
    quarters
    must
    elapse
    after
    the quarter in which
    the grace period
    test
    is completed,
    without a
    subsequent
    RATA
    having
    been
    conducted.
    2.4 Recertification,
    quality Assurance,
    and
    RATA Frequency
    (Special
    Considerations)
    (a)
    When a
    significant change is
    made to a
    monitoring
    system
    such
    that
    recertification
    of the
    monitoring
    system is required
    in
    accordance
    with
    Section
    1.4(b)of
    this
    Appendix,
    a
    recertification
    test
    (or tests)
    must be performed
    to
    ensure
    that the
    CEMS continues to
    generate
    valid
    data.
    In
    all
    recertifications,
    a RATA
    will
    be one
    of the required tests;
    for some
    recertifications,
    other
    tests
    will
    also be required.
    A
    recertification test
    may
    be used
    to
    satisfy
    the
    quality assurance
    test
    requirement
    of this
    Exhibit. For example,
    if, for
    a particular
    change made
    to a CEMS, one
    of the
    required
    recertification tests
    is a linearity check
    and the linearity
    check
    is successful,
    then,
    unless
    another
    such recertification
    event
    occurs in
    that
    same
    QA
    operating
    quarter,
    it would
    not
    be
    necessaryjQ
    perform
    an additional
    linearity test
    of the
    CEMS in that quarter
    to
    meet
    the quality
    assurance
    requirement of
    Section 2.2.1 of this
    Exhibit.
    For this
    reason.
    EPA recommends
    that
    owners
    or
    operators
    coordinate
    component
    replacements,
    system upgrades,
    and
    other events
    that
    may
    require
    recertification,
    to the extent practicable,
    with the
    periodic
    quality
    assurance
    testing
    required
    by
    this
    Exhibit.
    When
    a quality assurance
    test
    is
    done for
    the
    dual purpose
    of recertification
    and
    routine
    quality
    assurance, the applicable
    data validation
    procedures
    in Section
    1 .4(b)(3) must
    be
    followed.
    (b)
    Except as provided
    in Section 2.3.3
    of this Exhibit,
    whenever
    a passing
    RATA
    of
    a gas
    monitor
    is
    performed,
    or a passing 2-load
    (or
    2-level)
    RATA
    or apassing
    3-load
    (or
    3-level)
    RATA
    of
    a flow
    monitor
    is perfonned
    (irrespective
    of
    whether
    the
    RATA
    is done
    to satisfy a
    recertification
    requirement
    or to
    meet the
    quality assurance
    requirements
    of this Exhibit,
    or
    both),
    the
    RATA
    frequency
    (semi-annual
    or
    annual)
    must be
    established
    based
    upon
    the
    date and
    time
    of
    completion
    of
    the
    RATA and the relative
    accuracy
    percentage
    obtained.
    For 2-load
    (or 2-level)
    and
    3-load
    (or
    3-
    66

    iévefl
    flowRATAsusethe
    highest
    percentage
    relative
    accuracy’at
    any
    of
    the
    loads
    (Or
    levels)
    to
    determine
    the
    RATA
    frequency.
    The
    results
    of
    a
    single-load
    (or
    single-level)
    flow
    RATA
    may
    be
    used
    to
    establish
    the
    RATA
    frequency
    when
    the
    single-load
    (or
    single-level)
    flow
    RATA
    is
    specifically
    required
    under
    Section2.3..L3(b)ofthis
    Exhibitor.when.
    the
    single-load
    (orsingle-level)
    RATA
    is
    allowed
    under
    Section
    2.3.1.3(c)
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    for
    a
    unit
    that
    has
    operated
    at
    one
    load
    level
    (or
    operatingr.level)for:>=85.Op.ercentofthetirne.since...theilast
    annual
    flow
    RATA.
    No
    other
    single-load
    (or
    single-level)
    flow
    RATA
    may
    be
    used
    to
    establish
    an
    annual
    RATA
    frequency
    however,
    a
    2-load
    or
    3-load
    (or
    a
    2-level
    or
    3-level)
    flow
    RATA
    maybe
    performed
    at
    any
    time
    or
    in
    place
    of
    any
    required
    single-load
    (or
    single-level)
    RATA,
    in
    order
    to
    establish
    an
    annual
    RATA
    frequency.
    2.5
    Other
    Audits
    Affected
    units
    may
    be
    subject
    to
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audits
    at
    any
    time.
    If
    a
    monitor
    or
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    system
    fails
    the
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    during
    the
    audit,
    the
    monitor
    or
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    system
    will
    be
    considered
    to
    be
    out-of-control
    beginning
    with
    the
    date
    and
    time
    of
    completion
    of
    the
    audit,
    and
    continuing
    until
    a
    successful
    audit
    test
    is.
    completed
    following
    corrective
    action.
    2.6
    System
    Integrity
    Checks
    for
    Mercury
    Monitors
    For
    each
    mercury
    concentration
    monitoring
    system
    (except
    for
    a
    mercury
    monitor
    that
    does
    not
    have
    a
    converter),
    perform
    a
    single-point
    system
    integrity
    check
    weekly,
    i.e.,
    at
    least
    once
    every
    168
    unit
    or
    stack
    operating
    hours,
    using
    a
    NIST-traceable
    source
    of
    oxidized
    mercury.
    Perform
    this
    check
    using
    a
    mid-
    or
    high-level
    gas
    concentration,
    as
    defined
    in
    Section
    5.2
    of
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    The
    performance
    specifications
    in
    paragraph
    (3)
    of
    Section
    3.2
    of
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    Appendix
    must
    be
    met,
    otherwise
    the
    monitoring
    system
    is
    considered
    out-of-control,
    from
    the
    hour
    of
    the
    failed
    check
    until
    a
    subsequent
    system
    integrity
    check
    is
    passed.
    If
    a
    required
    system
    integrity
    check
    is
    not
    performed
    and
    passed
    within
    168
    unit
    or
    stack
    operating
    hours
    of
    last
    successful
    check,
    the
    njjpg
    system
    will
    also
    be
    considered
    out
    of
    control,
    beginning
    with
    the
    169th
    unit
    or
    stack
    erating
    hour
    ar
    the
    last
    successful
    checknd
    continu
    ...
    ntil
    a
    subsequent
    syciptt
    check
    is
    passed
    i
    ic
    r’
    1
    -
    ifl-’ti
    2.1.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    are
    performed
    using
    a
    NIST-traceable
    source
    of
    oxidized
    mercury.
    [Note:
    The
    following
    TABLE/FORM
    is
    too
    wide
    to
    be
    displayed
    on
    one
    screen.
    You
    must
    print
    it
    for
    a
    meaningful
    review
    of
    its
    contents.
    The
    table
    has
    been
    divided
    into
    multiple
    pieces
    with
    each
    piece
    containing
    information
    to
    help
    you
    assemble
    a
    printout
    ofthe-tábThè
    Theinformation
    for
    each
    piece
    includes:
    (1)
    a
    three
    line
    message
    preceding
    the
    tabular
    data
    showing
    by
    line
    4*
    and
    character
    4*
    the
    position
    of
    the
    upper
    left-hand
    corner
    of
    the
    piece
    and
    the
    position
    of
    the
    piece
    within
    the
    entire
    table;
    and
    (2)
    a
    numeric
    scale
    following
    the
    tabular
    data
    displaying
    the
    character
    positions.]
    67

    H
    Ii
    En
    *
    **
    H
    H-CHi)
    ***
    I
    J1Hfl
    H
    I)
    0
    ctH
    *
    *
    *
    CD
    ‘c
    CD
    H-
    I
    I
    **
    *
    +
    0
    CDHcrPJ
    ‘b
    I
    ***
    I
    -----------0
    (DID
    Fjflcr[-bh(
    ***
    I
    H,X
    (OIQH-0CD1I
    *
    **
    IHH—0
    hdctCD
    irti
    Iij
    ***
    HI0Hjt’J—,QH-
    QtCDb-i
    IH-
    *
    *
    OI
    Z-
    JH-rt
    IQ
    **
    I-JH
    i<fl
    P)flii
    l
    **
    U—Z
    *11-
    3—1(D
    I
    I
    I-
    *H-
    *
    Ir-,
    0*
    QID(J
    WI
    ‘CD
    *En*
    I
    I1j
    i)C)
    I
    *
    *
    +
    I0•
    -<CD
    P)5I1
    IH
    *H-*
    IH.
    EJ2O
    I-hrtCDO
    I
    l-I
    *tn
    *
    I
    —H-•
    0.
    crcQHH-o
    I
    CDI
    Hi
    *
    *
    I
    rt•
    0•
    CD
    00
    En
    ‘0
    *
    *
    MI—,0.
    M.
    I-RI
    ftl
    I-
    *H-*
    -
    —ID
    I
    *CD
    *
    IH-.
    H
    HiD)
    I
    Lii
    *0
    *
    ,M.
    0•
    *rnO.
    HE-Il
    l><
    *(D*
    M•
    ct*rt1•
    0
    I
    lJ
    *
    *
    (D’—CDH-
    —i
    IH-
    *H*
    +
    I
    Efl•
    I.Q
    ct.
    —M,
    I
    b
    *.
    *
    I•<.
    .
    l-.--.
    Q
    IH-
    *
    *
    I
    En.
    H-W
    .
    I
    ft
    *
    I
    *
    I.
    f1
    ft
    EI)•
    c-Il
    *
    *
    WI
    CD•
    -<
    —•
    iW
    *
    *
    o
    I.
    Ct
    .
    .
    I
    I
    *F-4*
    I
    En
    .
    I
    IQ
    *ct*
    I•
    I
    I
    Hi
    *
    *
    *b
    *
    z
    *CD
    *
    *
    *
    ti
    *H-*
    CD
    *
    *
    *ti)
    *
    $1
    *
    *
    H-
    *9)
    *
    ><
    *
    *
    W
    *0*
    **
    *9)
    *
    *
    *
    *9)
    *
    *1)
    *
    *r1
    *
    *CD
    *
    *
    *
    *
    *
    *
    H
    *
    *
    *
    *0
    *
    *Hi*
    *
    *
    *11
    *
    *9)
    *
    *EY
    *
    *
    H
    *
    *(D
    *
    *
    *
    *
    H
    *
    *
    H-
    *
    *j
    *
    *CD
    *
    *
    *
    *H
    *
    *•
    *
    *
    *
    ***
    *
    **
    ***
    ***
    *
    *
    *
    *
    **
    ***

    WI
    I
    I
    *
    **
    WI
    I
    I
    ft
    *
    **
    I
    .
    I
    I
    )
    *
    **
    I
    I
    h(
    *
    **
    I
    I
    f-I-
    *
    *
    *
    i_j
    I
    *
    **•
    I
    .
    .
    j9)
    —)
    *
    *
    *
    01
    I
    ZH-
    I
    Ui
    *
    *
    I
    .
    I
    *H
    WI.
    *-*
    I
    I
    9)1
    I
    *9)*
    I
    .
    I
    U)
    I
    I
    *H-*
    I
    I
    H-iQ
    *W
    *
    +
    I
    I
    C)
    I
    ç
    *
    *
    I
    I
    19)
    *H.*
    I
    I
    CD
    CI
    F—a
    *W
    *
    I
    I
    CD
    i
    H-
    *
    *
    liii
    I
    I
    ft
    *
    *
    di
    I
    H
    ftI<
    *H•*
    I
    I
    <
    (DI
    *(D
    *
    I
    I
    (I)
    I
    I
    *0
    *
    I
    I
    ft
    lCD
    *(D
    *
    I
    I
    lU)
    *
    *
    +
    I
    I
    0
    HiI
    ç
    *DJ*
    I
    I
    (i
    III
    *
    *
    I
    I,—,9)
    (DIP)
    *
    *
    I
    I
    I
    1
    *
    i
    *
    OI
    lf-i-
    I(
    *1
    *
    01
    I
    *CD
    (DI
    (1)
    *
    *
    I
    I—i-
    I
    *H*
    I
    I
    H
    01
    1-3
    *(1*
    I
    I
    I
    CD
    *
    *
    I
    I
    I
    CD
    *b*
    +
    I
    I
    h(
    If-I-
    *CD
    *
    I
    I
    (Di
    *
    *
    I
    I
    I
    *H-*
    I
    I
    Cl)
    lCD
    *
    *
    I
    (D
    H-IQ
    *CJ]
    *
    01
    Ir,
    I
    *
    *
    I
    I
    IxIH-
    (DI
    H-
    *9)
    *
    I
    I$)
    *rt*
    I
    I
    *
    CDI
    CD
    *
    *
    I
    I-P)
    P)i
    *0*
    +
    I
    I
    I-
    f-I-lCD
    *P)*
    I
    I
    (I)
    (I)
    Ii
    *9)
    *
    I
    I
    H
    I
    ft
    *11
    *
    I
    I
    —i
    U)
    *9)
    *
    I
    lj
    I
    *0
    *
    01
    I
    I
    *c-I-*
    I
    I
    *
    I
    *CD
    *
    I
    I
    I
    *
    *
    I
    I
    I
    *
    *
    I
    I
    I
    *W*
    +
    I
    I
    9)
    I
    *W*
    I
    H
    H
    I
    *
    *
    *0
    *
    *Hi*
    *
    _*
    *rI-
    *
    *9)
    *
    *tY
    *
    *
    H
    *
    *(D
    *
    *
    *
    *H*
    *
    H-
    *
    *
    *
    *CD
    *
    *
    *
    *H
    *
    *•
    *
    *
    *
    ***
    ***
    ***
    ***
    *
    **
    *
    **
    **
    *

    H
    —,
    .—,
    —,
    *
    **
    Frj
    hj
    Itj
    Fxj
    ***
    *
    *
    *
    (Drt
    H-Q(Pc-tpMQH)
    I
    P)*tf)rt*
    ***
    +0I
    H(P
    *p-
    ***
    (PHHI-0
    (D(Drtrt
    H-
    dOH-
    —I-$O
    ***
    H-(PPJ(PW--
    -xjrrn(PH-b
    H-
    ***
    P)rr
    H-
    tJ]
    Q0OOFiFH-F-]
    )
    d
    *
    *
    *F-]*
    O(DP)Ct31Op).HOP)
    1O
    r10(POcH-
    *P)*
    0F
    10DH<
    H-H
    (PH
    *H-*
    rtH-O
    (P
    *w
    *
    H•NHHIbH
    frbO(brt(PP)t
    HP)
    *
    *
    O(DO(PP)H(DrtQ
    r1-1Fm
    Oc-r
    *H-*
    +ç1(Dm(P
    (DOc-t-
    tj)j.
    rt
    Qct
    H-
    *(I)
    *
    1F1
    Hij
    (PP)H(P
    *
    *
    O
    (PH
    (POH-P)O0PJi-]
    FFQ(P
    Pi
    *
    *
    (P
    P)HP)Ho
    H(Drt
    dP)
    *H-*
    t’JU1>(D
    —(Dr-tOH
    H-fl
    H-Pw
    *(P
    *
    a•
    0F-I
    H-
    UrtP)
    *0*
    t’J(P
    Cfl(D(Prtp
    0
    *(P*
    FP)M1Q
    F-(D(PrtOF
    *
    *
    brtM
    H]
    I—]
    (i]0i
    tI)H,
    H-P)(D
    *(.,*
    -
    H-V
    P)W0H
    P)
    ct0HF0.
    F
    *•
    *
    +
    F-tflH
    H-OW(DH-
    H
    (PM-<H-10(P
    (P
    *
    *
    OO(PHS
    I
    iFH
    rt
    rt
    *1
    *
    Fh
    u1Q(PO101piHn(P<
    (P<(DOH-
    *1
    *
    0•
    Hrt(Dc1-
    H-Q.-<
    *
    *
    WOH(PQ
    H-(D0
    P)—
    i
    (flOP)(P(P
    *H*
    0.
    HH
    brt
    (t(P(PHH-H-
    i-tFF
    *rt
    *
    LnO(P
    P)(POH
    HHF.
    (P(P(P-t
    *
    *
    PH
    FQ(PCfl
    (D(D(P
    1OH-0(D
    (P(P
    *b*
    (PH-Q’
    I-
    tI-<
    *(P
    *
    —P)0-OH-O
    (D-
    H-IOH-
    (HU
    *Ifl*
    +(DOFI(P
    w
    QF-]0
    rt
    (P.
    0
    —i
    rt(P
    (P(PHc-tQ
    k<(Pc-tJ
    *
    *
    H-
    rt
    OH(P
    (Ptj
    0
    0
    *u
    *
    •Oc-t(P
    (DH-i0
    -rI-
    0
    010H
    *
    *
    HOPJO
    1
    (P(Dr-t(P
    HFH-
    (PH
    *(P*
    o
    FFF-j-i
    (PiP))(PQ
    (P(I)H-(P
    OP)
    *ct*
    tICflCi)
    H
    I]Ort
    (P
    0-]ct
    *
    *
    rtH-H-)HfrH-H-
    1
    Q
    i<
    (Du
    *0*
    rt
    0
    h
    H•>i(P
    (PQ1Q(PF-
    H-F0
    (PQ
    *(P
    *
    +b(PP
    H-1P)H
    f-”<
    Cfl(PH
    t(P
    *F
    *
    H-$
    rtp)Q(P
    rt
    H-
    00
    H-fl(P
    *P)
    *
    HF-hM,
    (Dfl
    I(P
    *0*
    P)QctQ0H-<Q
    0P)rt
    IQ
    H
    *rt*
    rtt
    0
    (P
    *0*
    o
    O
    .
    (P
    0
    PF-
    02
    I—hF
    HH-
    *t-
    *
    rt
    (P
    (PMH(j)
    -0
    Fj(P02
    i(P
    *
    *
    0HF’
    H-H----CJ)
    FlO
    (P
    P)FS
    *H*
    Fjfl)
    (PHHiOO(Pb
    h
    (P
    *
    *
    rt0FwrtOF
    )F0
    H
    OO
    rt
    (P
    *0
    *
    +P)
    I(PPiH
    rt
    (P0
    H-ctQ
    *hh*
    H-
    (PH(1
    (P
    OH-(P02
    hF-
    i
    F02
    *
    *
    02W
    (P
    H
    00)CD(P
    (P0H-
    02
    *ft*
    IF-h(P--(PH(P(DW
    F
    O.0(Prt
    -00
    *(P
    *
    HH(PrtQ(P<h
    [-liP)
    0
    dI
    o
    (POH
    F10(D(PowF1(-t
    H-Oh
    :(Pfl
    *H*
    0
    (PHrt•
    rt(PH-
    [-hthH-0)
    F(P
    *0
    *
    (P0
    HtflH-U1(P
    I
    F
    *
    *
    H(PI
    0
    (P0(P
    rt(P
    *H*
    P
    OF-]
    H(P—10J(P
    ><PH-
    H-
    *H-*
    +H-H(P
    0
    —tflQ
    HH-
    Ct
    P)(D
    *
    *
    >H-
    0<cflQl-H(P-
    ft
    H-1H-b
    H
    F-
    *(P
    *
    rtH-(P(PH-
    (P—
    (P
    H-t-h
    <
    *
    *
    002HtJ0
    OctF
    ON
    0
    *M*
    —1
    F
    —IQI
    (P0F(Prt
    (P(P10
    *H*
    O
    Ct
    IIH
    HH(PHHi
    02(P
    ‘10PJi
    (PP)O’l
    *.
    *
    (PH-(P(P(P(PF---
    rth
    H-
    H-
    (PF
    *
    *
    CflWQ<I
    P).
    rtH-02
    CtH(P
    f-t
    Ct
    i(DI-3H(Prt
    H----
    <10<F
    (n(P
    ***
    H-
    H-HO
    HH-j
    H-ct
    Ct
    F
    **
    *
    +
    j
    F-
    (P—I0w(n..
    0
    (P
    0-H-
    ***
    (P
    H-
    (1
    10
    F
    H-
    [
    i
    Ct
    *
    *
    *
    00-li
    I-h
    (P
    02
    0
    ***
    l--
    0(P
    (P
    0
    ***
    F
    ***
    C

    —,
    —‘
    A
    C)
    ‘xi
    Ci)
    (j,
    xj
    xj
    iI
    0
    AQ
    0
    H
    0
    0
    0’
    I
    H
    CD-tOc-r--,t
    MtnF-I--O,
    I-’-
    S
    M
    Q
    M
    Mi
    I
    U)
    I
    I
    Ct-
    vIxi
    0
    1:1
    0’
    i
    U)
    U)SIt1.l-h
    hb
    I
    F-’-
    —‘-
    F-I
    CD
    U)O
    Ok—’
    ftHHftOI-
    I
    l
    H
    H
    H-
    II-
    I-’.
    CDI
    CD
    —‘
    0
    l
    M
    Ob
    flI-3
    IQ
    t-H-C)t-CDi
    U)
    M
    CD
    CD
    0,
    0CDOCtC)U)—
    CDU)rtjc-t
    Hi
    5.
    ft
    CI-
    I
    I
    Q
    Cr
    I—I
    HH-I-’-CD
    Qct
    CD’
    I
    gC)
    P)CDCDU)U)HxjI—
    I
    .
    .
    .
    .
    O-t
    H-
    OCtCDCDH-p,
    .
    .
    .
    HiHI
    .
    .
    .
    .
    -<i
    CDC)
    OMit-’-Orn
    pin
    H-i
    .
    ‘-I
    I
    HCDdHCDHS
    WH,c-txjpi
    I
    I
    I
    I-’
    OH-h
    H-OOCDH-ZCD
    I
    I
    I
    Ftft5CtCD
    ftCCDM1c,)
    I
    —i
    .
    .
    -J
    I
    H
    Ohj()
    OCDU)F-,,
    CDLQ
    HiI
    .
    .
    .
    I
    I
    CI
    P)O
    I
    .
    .
    (ii
    .
    —J
    u-I’
    QftH-HU)CDt--
    CDO
    J’PiHFI,
    o\”
    .
    W
    xiH-ctQ
    DrrOU)—
    I
    -
    —1
    Ui
    Ui
    I
    O
    0
    b’CD
    U)
    OH3i
    ft
    I
    A
    ,,\O
    o\°
    A
    I
    I
    Q
    QCD
    5
    rtpiI-jHU)
    ui
    C)
    I-IiLIi
    H
    H
    I
    Hi
    H-
    0ftU)HiplH-OU)pi
    I
    0ti
    th
    bA
    bA
    tji
    (n3Ot
    0
    I
    0
    M
    U)
    5
    I
    I
    OQ-
    CDPH
    U)H—ctC)j,
    A
    —.
    A
    5
    Al
    —1
    H
    CDHiHPi
    GO
    CDCD
    I
    —,ZF
    OA
    5
    5
    rII
    I
    (1)1
    HH-U)
    P)rtOH0
    ftU)><
    I
    xj
    MIt
    i1
    WA
    WA
    xjH
    I
    CD
    CD
    i
    CDU)
    10
    -
    CDU)c-tI
    H
    Cr11
    ct-Il
    Zo
    5i
    OU)
    U)QflU)
    U)H-
    I
    ><A
    ,—,0
    ><
    H
    hI—’
    <.
    I—H-I
    Q
    H-I-rt-3
    0
    hj
    ftHift’j
    I
    —ll
    ‘tj-
    ‘—A
    0
    0
    .—O
    ‘dpi
    I
    H
    H-CDOc-r
    bZOplQCDCD,
    H
    Zo
    U
    --
    oi
    CD
    I
    C)SCDMHc-rCD
    )F
    -i
    0
    Z’
    H
    “10
    ‘10
    010U)
    ctCD
    —lCD
    I
    .
    .
    .
    0
    ,\“
    Zd
    0’
    Oh
    I
    I-
    -
    U)50
    CDCDMH
    0
    I
    0
    0
    ><
    t
    1’CDPJIWI
    U)
    0
    ><-
    P100W
    H-i
    o\’
    -0
    ‘—‘0
    ‘—-‘0
    .
    iHI
    I
    0
    CD
    h00Mct
    S><0U)I
    .
    .
    .
    H
    I-
    +Ict
    IU)W
    HU)
    0H-pipiCDH
    H-CD50
    I
    Q
    +
    I
    Ir-,I
    ftCD
    pict
    H-ftHp)h
    iI-iOHCDC-tI
    F-I
    •1
    +
    +
    HI
    xjICDH
    ct-CD
    -
    H
    -Il
    I
    I
    Uit
    I
    5p,
    CD5
    H-H
    CDHCD
    ft
    PpiCDI
    +
    0
    -0
    I
    I
    ft
    0U)-H-0
    H-U)CDrt
    I
    I
    0
    +
    •0I
    ‘—‘I
    H
    h
    Pi
    CD
    .
    0hct
    H-CDI
    H
    -
    I
    -0
    0
    I
    I
    b’U)
    Ct
    HiH-CD
    HP
    M
    M
    .
    W
    .
    I
    I
    CD
    CD
    H-HCD
    ‘-
    op
    ,
    -U,
    .
    .
    .
    .
    •o
    •o
    .
    ,
    0
    00h
    Hi00ftH
    I
    •0
    -
    I
    I
    H
    0,
    .
    .
    *
    I
    I
    C)
    CDct
    U)
    DP1Hh
    1hHiI
    I
    C)
    F-hO
    CDOH-
    <ftU)Hpipi
    I
    -
    I
    I
    CD
    M1SCDOcrCDCD
    U)Plt-jcrI
    X
    A
    I
    I
    OH-
    J3I-
    H---’I-
    ct
    ,
    II
    ZI
    F1
    :tl
    I
    I
    CDCD
    Hft5
    CD
    CDCD1
    A
    I
    I
    C)
    cl-
    ctCDPI
    b’
    H-b
    I-I
    I
    IF
    —.
    C)-
    H
    I
    OCD
    WCDft
    ft
    U)I
    —LI
    ‘‘1
    AQU,
    ‘hA
    A
    bA
    A
    I
    CDH
    H’1CD
    P)HiCD,
    Z
    Mo
    ZN
    U
    —ti
    ii
    I
    I
    S
    U)O><CDHH-piHQ0
    I
    U-
    ><
    M-.
    >—j
    5-
    -j
    I
    I
    CD
    H-H-
    5
    Q-ft
    CDOCDU)ftHO
    I
    d,°
    ‘—‘
    000
    ‘—‘-
    -
    5.
    ,
    I
    U)
    00
    CDHi’ftU)CDH
    I
    M
    Ui
    .
    Wui
    Ui
    I
    I
    CD
    CD
    Hi5
    <CD
    CD
    HOP,
    0
    0
    Ui
    cto\O
    I
    CC)
    H-
    CD0HOHU)U)
    I
    H
    d—+
    c’
    h
    ,
    I
    ‘-Xi
    CDZ
    ftCC)ipi-HCD5ft
    H---i
    ‘III
    0
    0
    0
    I
    I
    H
    00
    +
    OZ0
    H
    0
    NH
    H
    I
    I
    CUt
    crZ
    HM
    U)C)
    0H-IQrtI
    I
    HZ.
    H
    0
    I
    H-
    U)
    <
    H
    H-CD
    H-ft
    I
    H
    ‘-‘-J
    +
    Ui+
    +
    I
    OS
    hI)P)H-O
    <iU)JftU)
    I
    +.
    dt’
    I
    +
    ZI
    I
    I
    I
    CD
    Pl
    P)ZHU)HH-CD
    -
    JCJ)
    I
    0
    I
    H
    I
    0
    H
    I
    I
    U)
    HQftF--
    iI-
    HiCD5
    I
    0
    M
    I
    I
    C)
    MU)
    U)NCD
    0
    ctCDCD
    H-I
    H
    Ui
    0
    I
    I
    M
    o-
    U)’dbF-hCn
    p
    ,
    M
    0
    I
    Ui
    CDCD
    CDHCDC)CDh
    I
    M
    0
    1-h
    0
    Ui
    I
    I
    H
    Di
    DiH
    000
    HHPIi
    I
    0
    H
    ‘h
    I
    I
    H
    Hipifttjh
    Fh
    I
    U)
    Ui
    I
    I
    C)
    OOHH-
    1ftftpi
    I
    S
    I
    I
    CD
    0
    H
    HH
    CDO
    l-CDCDHI
    I
    I
    ‘-<
    H-55
    PiI-j-I
    I
    I
    CDCDOC)
    I
    I
    I
    H-
    I
    I
    I
    CDH
    CD

    Exhibit
    C to Appendix
    B--Conversion
    Procedures
    1.
    Applicability
    Use the
    procedures
    in
    this
    Exhibit to
    convert measured
    data
    from
    a
    monitor
    or
    continuous
    emission
    monitoring
    system
    into
    the
    appropriate
    units of
    the standard.
    2.
    Procedures
    for Heat
    Input
    Use the following
    procedures
    to compute
    heat input
    rate to
    an
    affected
    unit
    (in mmBtu/hr
    or
    mmBtu/day):
    2.1
    Calculate
    and
    record heat
    input rate
    to an affected
    unit
    on an
    hourly
    basis.
    The
    owner
    or
    operator
    may
    choose
    to use the
    provisions
    specified
    in 40 CFR
    75.16(e),
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    in conjunction
    with the
    procedures
    provided in
    Sections
    2.4
    through
    2.4.2
    to
    apportion
    heat
    input
    among
    each
    unit
    using
    the
    common stack
    or common
    pipe
    header.
    2.2
    For
    an affected
    unit
    that has
    a flow monitor
    (or
    approved alternate
    monitoring
    system
    under
    subpart
    E of 40 CFR
    75,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section 225.140,
    for
    measuring
    volumetric
    flow
    rate)
    and a diluent
    gas
    (Q
    or
    C0
    2)
    monitor,
    use
    the recorded
    data
    from
    these
    monitors
    and
    one
    of the
    following
    equations
    to
    calculate
    hourly heat
    input rate
    (in
    mmBtu/hr).
    2.2.1
    When
    measurements
    of
    CO
    2
    concentration
    are
    on
    a wet basis,
    use
    the
    following
    equation:
    HI=Q
    i%CO
    21
    wF
    100
    (EciuationF-15)
    Where:
    HI
    Hourly
    heat input
    rate during
    unit operation,
    mmBtulhr.
    = Hourly
    average volumetric
    flow
    rate during
    unit
    operation,
    wet
    basis,
    scth.
    = Carbon-based
    F-factor,
    listed in
    Section 3.3.5
    of Appendix
    F to
    40
    CFR 75
    for
    each
    fuel,
    scf/mmBtu.
    72

    %CO
    21
    Hourly
    concentration
    of
    CO
    2
    during
    unit
    operation,
    percent
    CO
    2
    wet
    basis.
    2.2.2
    When
    measurements
    of
    CO
    2
    concentration
    are
    on
    a
    dry
    basis,
    use
    the
    following
    equation:
    HI
    =
    QhF
    (100
    %H
    2
    0)lIhCO
    2d
    (Equation
    F-16)
    L
    10OF
    ]
    100
    ,)
    Where:
    HI
    =
    Hourly
    heat
    input
    rate
    during
    unit
    operation,
    mmBtu/hr.
    =
    Hourly
    average
    volumetric
    flow
    rate
    during
    unit
    operation,
    wet
    basis,
    scth.
    ]
    Carbon-based
    F-Factor,
    listed
    in
    Section
    3.3.5
    of
    Appendix
    F
    to
    40
    CFR
    75
    for
    each
    fuel,
    scf/mmBtu.
    %CO
    2d
    Hourly
    concentration
    of
    CO
    1
    during
    unit
    operation,
    percent
    CO
    2
    dry
    basis.
    %H
    2
    0
    =
    Moisture
    content
    of
    gas
    in
    the
    stack,
    percent.
    2.2.3
    When measurements
    of
    0,
    concentration
    are
    on
    a wet
    basis,
    use
    the
    following
    equation:
    HI
    Q
    [(2o.9/looXloo
    %H
    2
    0)—
    %02W1
    W
    (Equation
    F-17)
    F
    20.9
    Where:
    HI
    =
    Hourly
    heat
    input
    rate
    during
    unit
    operation,
    mmBtulhr.
    =
    Hourly
    average
    volumetric
    flow
    rate
    during
    unit
    operation,
    wet
    basis,
    scth.
    73

    F
    = Dry
    basis
    F-factor,
    listed in Section
    3.3.5
    of
    Appendix
    F to 40 CFR
    75 for
    each
    fuel,
    dscf7mmBtu.
    %02W
    = Hourly concentration
    of
    02
    during
    unit operation, percent
    0,
    wet
    basis.
    %H
    20
    Hourly
    average
    stack moisture content,
    percent
    by
    volume.
    For any operating hour where Equation F-17
    results in an hourly heat input rate
    that
    is
    <= 0.0
    mmBtu/hr, 1.0 mmBtulhr
    must
    be recorded and
    reported
    as the heat
    input
    rate for that
    hour.
    2.2.4
    When measurements of
    0,
    concentration
    are on a dry basis, use the following equation:
    HI
    = Q
    f(ioo — %H
    2
    0)j(20.9
    — °2d
    W[
    (Equation F-i
    8)
    iOOF
    JL
    20.9.
    J
    Where:
    HI
    = Hourly heat input rate during unit operation, mmBtu!hr.
    Q
    = Hourly
    average volumetric flow during
    unit operation, wet basis, scfh.
    F = Dry basis F-factor, listed in Section 3.3.5 of Appendix F to 40
    CFR 75 for
    each
    fuel,
    dscf/mmBtu.
    %H
    20
    Moisture content of the stack gas, percent.
    %°2d
    = Hourly concentration of
    0,
    during unit operation, percent
    02
    dry basis.
    2.3
    Heat
    Input Summation (for Heat Input Determined Using a Flow
    Monitor and Diluent
    Monitor)
    2.3.1
    Calculate
    total
    quarterly heat
    input
    for a unit or common stack
    using a flow monitor
    and
    diluent
    monitor
    to calculate heat input,
    using
    the following equation:
    74

    HIq
    =
    HI
    1
    t
    1
    (Equation
    F-18a)
    hour=1
    Where:
    HIg
    =
    Total
    heat
    input
    for
    the
    quarter,
    mmBtu.
    HI,
    =
    Hourly
    heat
    input
    rate
    during
    unit
    operation,
    using
    Equation
    F-iS,
    F-16,
    F-17,
    or
    F-18,
    mmBtu/hr.
    =
    Hourly
    operating
    time
    for
    the
    unit
    or
    common
    stack,
    hour
    or
    fraction
    of
    an
    hour
    (in
    eq
    increments
    that
    can
    range
    from
    one
    hundredth
    to
    one
    quarter
    of
    an
    hour,
    at
    the
    option
    of
    the
    owner
    or
    operator’).
    2.3.2
    Calculate
    total cumulative
    heat
    input
    for
    a
    unit
    or
    common
    stack
    using
    a
    flow
    monitor
    and
    diluent
    monitor
    to
    calculate
    heat input,
    using the
    following
    equation:
    the
    current
    quarter
    HIc
    =
    HIq
    (Equation
    F-i
    8b
    -
    q1
    Where:
    Hic
    =
    Total
    heat
    input
    for
    the
    year
    to
    date,
    mmBtu.
    HIq
    =
    Total
    heat input
    for
    the
    quarter,
    mmBtu.
    2.4
    Heat
    Input
    Rate Apportionment
    for
    Units
    Sharing
    a
    Common
    Stack
    or
    Pipe
    2.4.1
    Where
    applicable,
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    of
    an
    affected
    unit
    that determines
    heat
    input
    rate
    at
    the
    unit
    level
    by
    apportioning
    the
    heat input
    monitored
    at
    a
    common
    stack
    or
    common
    pipe using
    megawatts
    must apportion
    the
    heat
    input
    rate
    using the
    following
    equation:
    75

    HI
    =
    HIcs[cI
    Mt
    1
    (Equation
    F21a)
    Where:
    HJ
    = Heat input
    rate for a unit, mmBtulhr.
    HI
    = Heat
    input rate at the
    common stack
    or
    pipe,
    mmBtu/hr.
    = Gross electrical
    output,
    MWe.
    = Unit operating
    time,
    hour or
    fraction
    of an
    hour
    (in
    equal
    increments
    that can
    range
    from
    one
    hundredth to one
    quarter of an hour,
    at the
    option
    of
    the
    owner or
    operator).
    Common
    stack or common pipe
    operating
    time, hour
    or fraction of an
    hour
    (in
    equal
    increments
    that can range
    from one
    hundredth to one
    quarter of an hour,
    at the
    option
    of the
    owner
    or
    operator).
    n = Total
    number of units using
    the common
    stack or pipe.
    i
    =Designation of a
    particular
    unit.
    2.4.2
    Where
    applicable, the
    owner
    or
    operator
    of an
    affected
    unit that
    determines the heat
    input
    rate
    at
    the
    unit
    level by apportioning
    the heat input
    rate
    monitored
    at a common
    stack
    or common
    pipe
    using
    steam load must
    apportion
    the heat
    input rate
    using
    the following
    equation:
    HI
    1 =
    (EquationF-21b)
    ti
    SFt
    1
    Where:
    HI
    1 = Heat
    input
    rate for a
    unit, mmBtu/hr.
    76

    HI
    3
    Heat
    input
    rate
    at
    the
    common
    stack
    or
    pipe,
    mmBtu/hr.
    SF
    Gross
    steam
    load,
    lb/hr.
    or mmBtulhr.
    =
    Unit
    operating
    time,
    hour
    or
    fraction
    of
    an
    hour
    (in
    equal
    increments
    that
    can
    range
    from
    one
    hundredth
    to
    one
    quarter
    of
    an
    hour,
    at
    the
    option
    of
    the
    owner
    or
    operator).
    =
    Conirnon
    stack
    or
    common
    pipe
    operating
    time,
    hour
    or
    fraction of
    an
    hour
    (in
    equal
    increments
    that
    can
    range
    from
    one
    hundredth
    to
    one
    quarter
    of
    an hour,
    at the
    option
    of
    the
    owner
    or
    operator).
    n
    Total
    number
    of
    units
    using
    the common
    stack
    or
    pipe.
    i
    =
    Designation
    of
    a particular
    unit.
    2.5
    Heat
    Input
    Rate
    Summation
    fOr
    Units
    with
    Multiple
    Stacks
    or
    Pipes
    The
    owner
    or
    operator
    of an
    affected
    unit
    that
    determines
    the
    heat
    input
    rate
    at the
    unit
    level
    by
    summing
    the
    heat
    input
    rates
    monitored
    at multiple
    stacks
    or
    multiple
    pipes
    must
    sum
    the
    heat
    input
    rates
    using
    the
    following
    equation:
    HIt
    (Equation
    F-2
    1
    c)
    tUnit
    Where:
    HI,
    111
    =
    Heat
    input
    rate
    for
    a
    unit,
    mmBtuJhr.
    HI
    3
    =
    Heat
    input
    rate
    for
    the
    individual
    stack,
    duct,
    or pipe,
    mmBtu!hr.
    =
    Unit
    operating time,
    hour
    or
    fraction
    of
    the
    hour
    (in
    equal
    increments that
    can
    range
    from
    one
    hundredth to
    one
    quarter
    of
    an
    hour,
    at
    the
    option
    of
    the
    owner
    or
    operator).
    =
    Operating time
    for
    the
    individual
    stack
    or
    pipe,
    hour
    or
    fraction
    of
    the
    hour
    (in
    equal
    increments
    that
    can
    range
    from
    one
    hundredth
    to one
    quarter
    of
    an
    hour,
    at
    the
    option
    of
    the
    owner
    or
    operator).
    s
    =
    Designation for
    a
    particular
    stack,
    duct,
    or
    pipe.
    77

    3.
    Procedure
    for
    Converting
    Volumetric
    Flow
    to
    STP
    Use
    the
    following
    equation
    to
    convert
    volumetric
    flow
    at
    actual
    temperature
    and
    pressure
    to
    standard
    temperature and
    pressure.
    = FActual
    (TSfd
    ITStack
    XStack
    “1S,d)
    (Equation
    F-22)
    Where:
    =Flue
    gas
    volumetric
    flow
    rate
    at
    standard
    temperature
    and pressure,
    scth.
    FAct,a!
    =Flue
    gas
    volumetric
    flow
    rate
    at actual
    temperature
    and pressure,
    acfh.
    T
    =Standard temperature=528
    degreesR.
    TStack
    =Flue
    gas
    temperature
    at flow
    monitor
    location,
    degreesR,
    where
    degreesR=460+degreesF.
    ‘Stack
    =The
    absolute
    flue
    gas
    pressure=barometric
    pressure
    at
    the
    flow
    monitor
    location
    +
    flue
    gas
    static
    pressure,
    inches
    of
    mercury.
    ‘std
    =Standard pressure=29.
    92
    inches
    of
    mercury.
    4.
    Procedures
    for
    Mercury
    Mass
    Emissions.
    4.1
    Use
    the
    procedures
    in this
    Section
    to calculate
    the
    hourly
    mercury
    mass
    emissions
    (in
    ounces)
    at
    each
    monitored
    location, for
    the
    affected
    unit
    or
    group
    of units
    that discharge
    through
    a
    common
    stack.
    4.1.1
    To
    determine the hourly
    mercury
    mass
    emissions
    when
    using
    a
    mercury
    concentration
    monitoring
    system
    that
    measures
    on
    a wet
    basis
    and
    a
    flow
    monitor,
    use
    the following
    equation:
    Mh
    = KChQhth
    (Equation
    F-28)
    78

    Where:
    =
    Mercury
    mass
    emissions
    for
    the
    hour,
    rounded
    off
    to
    three
    decimal
    places,
    (ounces).
    K
    =
    Units
    conversion
    constant,
    9.978
    x
    10°
    oz-scmljig-scf
    Ch
    Hourly
    mercury
    concentration,
    wet
    basis,
    adjusted
    for
    bias
    if
    the
    bias-test
    procedures
    in
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this Appendix
    show
    that
    a
    bias-adjustment
    factor
    is
    necessary,
    (,ig!wscm).
    Qh
    =
    Hourly
    stack
    gas
    volumetric
    flow
    rate,
    adjusted
    for
    bias,
    where
    the
    bias-test
    procedures
    in
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    Appendix
    shows
    a
    bias-adjustment
    factor
    is
    necessary,
    (scfh)
    th
    =
    Unit
    or
    stack
    operating
    time,
    as
    defined
    in
    40
    CFR 72.2,
    (hr)
    4.1.2
    To
    determine
    the
    hourly
    mercury
    mass
    emissions
    when
    using
    a
    mercury
    concentration
    monitoring
    system
    that
    measures
    on
    a
    dry
    basis
    or a
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system
    and
    a
    flow
    monitor,
    use
    the
    following
    equation:
    =
    KChQ
    I/h
    (i
    B
    5
    )
    (Equation
    F-29)
    Where:
    M,
    1
    =
    mercury
    mass
    emissions
    for
    the
    hour,
    rounded
    off
    to
    three
    decimal
    places,
    (ounces).
    K
    =
    Units
    conversion
    constant,
    9.978
    x
    1
    0’
    oz-scmk<mu>>g-scf
    Ch
    =Hourly
    mercury
    concentration,
    dry basis,
    adjusted
    for
    bias
    if
    the
    bias-test
    procedures
    in
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    Appei
    1
    dix
    show
    that
    ias-adjustment
    factor
    is
    necessary,
    (tg/dscnznt
    trap
    systems,
    a
    single
    value
    L
    13
    lflWPrOjOr
    m..fl
    tor
    ne
    data
    collection
    period),
    is
    applied
    to
    each
    hour
    in
    the
    data
    collection
    period,
    for
    a
    particular
    pair
    of
    traps.
    Qh
    =
    Hourly
    stack
    gas volumetric
    flow
    rate,
    adjusted
    for
    bias,
    where
    the bias-test
    procedures
    in
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    Appendix
    shows
    a
    bias-adjustment
    factor
    is
    necessary,
    (seth)
    Moisture
    fraction
    of
    the
    stack
    gas,
    expressed
    as
    a
    decimal
    (equal
    to
    %H
    2
    0
    jQQ
    79

    th
    Uiiitor
    stack
    operatingtirne,
    asdefined
    in 4c’CFW72.2,
    (h)
    4.1.3
    For
    units
    that
    are demonstrated
    under
    Section
    1.15(d)
    of this
    Appendix
    to emit
    less
    than
    464
    ounces
    of
    mercury
    per
    year,
    and
    for
    which
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    elects
    not
    to
    continuously
    monitor
    the
    mercury
    concentration,
    calculate
    the
    hourly
    mercury
    mass
    emissions
    using
    Equation
    F-28
    in
    Section
    4.1.1
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    except
    that
    “Ch
    will
    be the
    applicable
    default
    mercury
    concentration
    from
    or (e)
    of
    this
    Appendix,
    expressed
    in
    jig/scm.
    Correction
    for
    the
    stack
    gas
    moisture
    content
    is not
    required
    when
    this
    methodology
    is
    used.
    4.2
    Use
    the
    following
    equation
    to
    calculate
    quarterly
    and
    year-to-date
    mercury
    mass
    emissions
    in
    ounces:
    Mtime
    period
    =
    (Equation
    F-30)
    h=1
    Where:
    time
    — period
    =
    Mercury
    mass
    emissions
    for
    the
    given
    time
    period
    i.e.,
    quarter
    or
    year-to-date,
    rounded
    to
    the
    nearest
    thousandth,
    (ounces).
    M,
    Mercury
    mass
    emissions
    for
    the hour,
    rounded
    to
    three
    decimal
    places,
    (ounces).
    n
    = The
    number
    of
    hours
    in
    the
    given
    time
    period
    (quarter
    or year-to-date).
    4.3
    If
    heat
    input
    rate
    monitoring
    is required,
    follow
    the
    applicable
    procedures
    for
    1t
    apnortio1i’ 9idS1’’rnatiOn
    in
    Sections
    2.3.
    2.4
    and
    2.5
    of
    this
    Fviibit
    5.
    Moisture
    Determination
    From
    Wet
    and
    Dry
    Q2
    Readings
    If a
    correction for
    the stack
    gas
    moisture
    content
    is
    required
    in
    any
    of
    the emissions
    or
    heat
    input
    calculations
    described
    in
    this
    Exhibit,
    and
    if the
    hourly
    moisture
    content
    is determined
    from
    wet-
    and
    4y-basis
    O
    readings,
    use
    Equation
    F-3
    1 to
    calculate
    the
    percent
    moisture,
    unless
    a
    “K”
    factor
    or
    other
    mathematical
    algorithm is
    developed
    as
    described
    in Section
    6.5.6(a)
    of
    Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    ppendix:
    80

    %H
    20
    (02d_02w)XloO
    (Equation
    F-31)
    Where:
    %H
    2
    0=
    Hourly
    average
    stack
    gas moisture
    content,
    percent
    H
    20
    °2d
    =
    Dry-basis
    hourly
    average
    oxygen
    concentration,
    percent
    02
    °2w
    =
    Wet-basis
    hourly
    average
    oxygen
    concentration,
    percent
    02
    Exhibit
    D
    to
    Appendix
    B--Quality
    Assurance
    and
    Operating
    Procedures
    for
    Sorbent
    Trap
    Monitoring
    Systems
    1.0
    Scope
    and
    Application
    This Exhibit
    specifies
    sampling,
    and
    analytical,
    and
    quality-assurance
    criteria
    and
    procedures
    for
    the
    performance-based
    monitoring
    of
    vapor-phase
    mercury
    (Hg)
    emissions
    in
    combustion
    flueg
    streams,
    using
    a
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system
    (as
    defined
    in
    Section
    225.130).
    The
    principle
    employed
    is
    continuous
    sampling
    using
    in-stack
    sorbent
    media
    coupled
    with
    analysis
    of
    the
    integrated
    samples.
    The
    performance-based
    approach
    of
    this
    Exhibit
    allows
    for
    use
    of
    various
    suitable
    sampling
    and
    analytical
    technologies
    while
    maintaining
    a
    specified
    and
    documented
    level
    of
    data quality
    through
    performance
    criteria.
    Persons
    using
    this
    Exhibit
    should
    have
    a
    thorough
    working
    knowledge
    of
    Methods
    1,
    2,
    3,
    4
    and
    5
    in
    appendices
    A-i through
    A-3
    to
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    as
    well
    as
    the
    determinative
    technique
    selected
    for
    analysis.
    1.1
    Analytes.
    The
    analyte
    measured
    by
    these
    procedures
    and
    specifications
    is
    total
    vapor-phase
    mercury
    in
    the
    flue
    gas,
    which
    represents
    the
    sum
    of
    elemental
    mercury
    (Hg°,
    CAS
    Number
    7439-97-6)
    and
    oxidized
    forms
    of
    mercury,
    in
    mass
    concentration
    units
    of micrograms
    per
    dry
    standard
    cubic
    meter
    (ig/dscm).
    1.2
    Applicability.
    81

    These performance criteria and procedures
    are applicable to monitoring
    of vapor-phase
    mercury
    emissions under relatively low-dust
    ôonditions
    (i.e.,
    sampling in
    the stack after all
    pollution
    control
    devices),
    from coal-fired
    electric- utility steam generators-whiclv are
    subject to Sections
    1.14
    through
    1.18 of Appendix B. Individual sample collection times can range
    from 30 minutes
    to several
    days in
    duration,
    depending
    on. themercury- concentration in-the
    stack-The-monitoring-system
    must
    achieve
    the
    performance
    criteria
    specified
    in Section
    8
    of this Exhibit
    and the sorbent media
    capture
    ability
    must
    not
    be
    exceeded.
    The
    sampling
    rate must be maintained at
    a constant proportion
    to
    the
    total
    stack flow rate to ensure representativeness
    of the sample collected.
    Failure to achieve
    certain
    performance criteria
    will
    result in invalid mercury emissions
    monitoring data.
    2.0 Principle.
    Known volumes
    of
    flue gas are extracted
    from a stack or duct through
    paired,
    in-stack,
    pre-spiked
    sorbent media traps at an appropriate nominal flow rate.
    Collection of mercury on the
    sorbent
    media
    in the
    stack
    mitigates potential loss
    of mercury during transport through
    a probe/sample
    line.
    Paired
    train
    sampling is required to determine measurement
    precision
    and verify
    acceptability
    of
    the
    measured emissions data.
    The
    sorbent
    traps
    are recovered
    from the sampling system, prepared
    for analysis, as
    needed,
    and
    analyzed by any
    suitable determinative
    techniciue
    that can meet the
    performance
    criteria.
    A
    section
    of each
    sorbent trap
    is
    spiked
    with
    Hg° prior to
    sampling. This section is analyzed
    separately
    and
    the
    recovery
    value is used to correct the individual mercury
    sample
    for measurement
    bias.
    3.0 Clean Handling and Contamination.
    To
    avoid mercury
    contamination
    of
    the
    samples, special attention
    should be paid to
    cleanliness
    during transport,
    field
    handling, sampling,
    recovery, and laboratory analysis,
    as well
    as
    during
    preparation of
    the sorbent cartridges. Collection and analysis
    of blank
    samples (field,
    trip,
    lab)
    is
    useful
    in verifying the absence of contaminant mercury.
    -
    4.0 Safety.
    -
    -
    4.1 Site hazards.
    Site
    hazards
    must be thoroughly considered in advance
    of applying these procedures/specifications
    in
    the field;
    advance coordination with the site is critical
    to understand the
    conditions
    and
    applicable
    safety
    policies.
    At a minimum, portions of the sampling
    system will
    be hot, requiring
    appropriate
    gloves, long
    sleeves, and caution in
    handling
    this equipment.
    4.2
    Laboratory safety policies.
    Laboratory
    safety
    policies should be in place to minimize
    risk
    of chemical
    exposure and
    to
    properly
    82

    handle
    waste
    disposal.
    Personne1must
    wear
    appropriate
    laboratory
    attire
    according
    to
    a
    Chemical
    Hygiene
    Plan
    established
    by
    the
    laboratory.
    4.3
    Toxicity
    orcarcinogenicity;
    The
    toxicity
    or
    carcinogenicity
    of
    anyreagents
    used
    must
    be
    considered.
    Depending
    upon
    the
    sampling
    and
    analytical
    technologies
    selected,
    this
    measurement
    may
    involve
    hazardous
    materials,
    operations,
    and
    equipment
    and
    this
    Exhibit
    does
    not
    address
    all
    of
    the
    safety
    problems
    associated
    with
    implementing
    this
    approach.
    It
    is
    the
    responsibility
    of
    the
    user
    to
    establish
    appropriate
    safety
    health
    practices
    and
    determine
    the
    applicable
    regulatory
    limitations
    prior
    to
    performance.
    Any
    chemical
    should
    be
    regarded
    as
    a potential
    health
    hazard
    and
    exposure
    to
    these
    compounds
    should
    be
    minimized.
    Chemists
    should
    refer
    to
    the
    Material
    Safety
    Data
    Sheet
    (MSDS)
    for
    each
    chemical
    used.
    4.4
    Wastes.
    Any
    wastes generated
    by
    this
    procedure
    must
    be
    disposed
    of
    according
    to
    a hazardous
    materials
    management
    plan
    that
    details
    and
    tracks
    various
    waste
    streams
    and
    disposal
    procedures.
    5.0
    Equipment
    and
    Supplies.
    The
    following
    list
    is
    presented
    as
    an
    example
    of
    key
    equipment
    and
    supplies
    likely
    required
    to
    perform
    vapor-phase
    mercury
    monitoring
    using
    a sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system.
    It
    is
    recognized
    that
    additional
    equipment
    and
    supplies
    may
    be
    needed.
    Collection
    of
    paired
    samples
    is
    required.
    Also
    required
    are
    a
    certified
    stack
    gas
    volumetric
    flow
    monitor
    that meets
    the
    requirements
    of
    Section
    1.2
    to
    this
    Appendix
    and
    an
    acceptable
    means
    of
    correcting
    for
    the
    stack
    gas
    moisture
    content,
    i.e.,
    either
    by
    using
    data
    from
    a
    certified
    continuous
    moisture
    monitoring
    system
    or
    by
    using
    an
    approved
    default
    moisture
    value
    (see
    40
    CFR
    75.11(b),
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140).
    5.1
    Sorbent
    Trap
    Monitoring
    System.
    A
    typical
    sorb
    ent
    trap
    monitoring
    system
    is
    shown
    in
    Figure
    K-i.
    The
    monitoring
    system
    must
    include the
    following
    components:
    5.1.1
    Sorbent
    Traps.
    The sorbent media
    used
    to
    collect
    mercury
    must
    be
    configured
    in
    a
    trap
    with
    three
    distinct
    and
    identical
    segments
    or
    sections,
    connected
    in
    series,
    that
    are
    amenable
    to separate
    analyses.
    Section
    1.
    is
    designated
    for
    primary
    capture
    of
    gaseous
    mercury.
    Section
    2
    is
    designated
    as
    a backup
    section
    for
    determination
    of
    vapor-phase
    mercury
    breakthrough.
    Section
    3 is
    designated
    for
    QA/OC
    purposes
    where
    this
    section
    must
    be
    spiked
    with
    a
    known
    amount
    of
    gaseous
    Hg°
    prior
    to
    sampling
    and
    later
    analyzed
    to
    determine
    recovery
    efficiency.
    The
    sorbent
    media
    may
    be
    any
    collection
    material
    (e.g.,
    carbon,
    chemically-treated
    filter,
    etc.)
    capable
    of
    quantitatively
    capturing
    and
    recovering
    for
    83

    subsequent
    analysis;ali
    gaseousforrus
    of rneruryfor the
    intended application:
    SeiCctioir
    of
    th&
    sorbent
    media must be
    based
    on the
    material’s
    ability to achieve the
    performance
    criteria
    contained
    in
    Section
    8
    of this
    Exhibit
    as
    well as the
    sorbent’s vapor-phase
    mercury
    capture
    efficiency
    for
    the
    emissions
    matrix
    and the
    expected sampling
    durationat
    the
    test
    site. The
    sorbent
    media
    must
    be
    obtained
    from a source
    that can demonstrate
    the
    quality
    assurance
    and control
    necessary
    to
    ensure
    consistent
    reliability.
    The
    paired sorbent
    traps are,
    suported
    on
    a:probe
    (or
    probes)
    and
    inserted
    directly
    into
    the
    flue
    gas stream.
    5.1.2 Sampling
    Probe
    Assembly.
    Each
    probe
    assembly
    must
    have a leak-free Exhibit
    to the sorbent
    trap(s).
    Each sorbent
    trap
    must
    be
    mounted
    at the entrance of or
    within the
    probe such that
    the gas sampled
    enters the
    trap
    directly.
    Each probe/sorbent
    trap assembly
    must be heated
    to a temperature
    sufficient
    to
    prevent
    liquid
    condensation
    in the sorbent trap(s).
    Auxiliary
    heating is required
    only where
    the
    stack
    temperature
    is
    too low to prevent
    condensation.
    Use a calibrated
    thermocouple
    to monitor
    the stack
    temperature.
    A
    single probe
    capable
    of operating
    the paired
    sorbent
    traps may
    be used. Alternatively,
    individual
    probe/sorbent
    trap assemblies
    may be used, provided
    that
    the
    individual
    sorbent
    traps
    are
    co-located
    to ensure
    representative mercury
    monitoring
    and are sufficiently
    separated
    to prevent
    aerodynamic
    interference.
    5.1.3 Moisture
    Removal
    Device
    A
    robust
    moisture
    removal device
    or
    system, suitable
    for continuous
    duty
    (such
    as a
    Pëltier
    cooler),
    must be used
    to
    remove water vapor
    from the gas
    stream
    prior
    to entering
    the
    gas flow
    meter.
    5.1.4
    Vacuum Pump.
    Use
    a leak-tight, vacuum
    pump capable
    of operating
    within the candidate
    system’s
    flow
    range.
    5.1.5
    Gas Flow
    Meter
    A gas
    flow
    meter
    (such as a dry gas meter,
    thermal
    mass
    flow meter,
    or
    other
    suitable
    measurement
    device)
    must
    be
    used to determine
    the total
    sample
    volume on
    a dry basis, in
    units of
    standard
    cubic
    meters. The
    meter must be sufficiently
    accurate
    to measure the
    total
    sample
    volume
    to
    within
    2
    percent
    and must be
    calibrated
    at selected flow
    rates
    across
    the range
    of
    sample
    flow
    rates
    at
    which
    the
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring system
    typically
    operates. The
    gas
    flow
    meter must
    be
    equipped
    with
    any necessary
    auxiliary measurement
    devices
    (e.g.,
    temperature sensors,
    pressure
    measurement
    devices)
    needed
    to
    correct
    the sample
    volume
    to standard
    conditions.
    5.1.6
    Sample
    Flow
    Rate
    Meter
    and
    Controller.
    Use a
    flow rate indicator and
    controller for maintaining
    necessary
    sampling
    flow rates.
    84

    5.I.7’TeihperattireSensor:
    Same
    as
    Section
    6.1.1.7
    of
    Method
    5
    in
    appendix
    A-3
    to
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140:
    5.1.8
    Barometer;:
    Same
    as
    Section
    6.1.2
    of
    Method
    5
    in
    appendix
    A-3
    to
    40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140.
    5.1.9
    Data
    Logger
    (Optional).
    Device
    for
    recording
    associated
    and
    necessary
    ancillary
    information
    (e.g.,
    temperatures,
    pressures,
    flow,
    time,
    etc.).
    5.2
    Gaseous
    Hg°
    Sorbent
    Trap
    Spiking
    System.
    A
    known
    mass
    of
    gaseous
    Hg°
    must
    be
    spiked
    onto
    section
    3
    of
    each
    sorbent
    trap
    prior
    to
    sampling.
    Any
    approach
    capable
    of
    quantitatively
    delivering
    known
    masses
    of
    Hg°
    onto
    sorbent
    traps
    is
    acceptable.
    Several
    technologies
    or
    devices
    are
    available
    to
    meet
    this
    objective.
    Their
    practicality
    is
    a
    function
    of
    mercury
    mass
    spike
    levels.
    For
    low
    levels,
    NIST-certified
    or
    NIST-traceable
    gas
    generators
    or
    tanks may
    be
    suitable,
    but
    will
    likely
    require
    long
    preparation
    times
    A
    more
    practical,
    alternative
    system,
    capable
    of
    delivering
    almost
    any
    mass
    required,
    makes
    use
    of
    NIST-certjfied
    or
    NIST-traceable
    mercury
    salt
    solutions
    (e.g.,
    Hg(N03)2).
    With
    this
    system,
    an
    aliquot
    of
    known
    volume
    and
    concentration
    is
    added
    to
    a
    reaction
    vessel
    containing
    a
    reducing
    agent
    (e.g.,
    stannous
    chloride);
    the
    mercury
    salt solution
    is
    reduced
    to
    Hg°
    and
    purged
    onto
    section
    3
    of
    the
    sorbent
    trap
    using
    an
    impinger
    sparging
    system.
    5.3
    Sample
    Analysis
    Equipment.
    Any analytical
    system
    capable
    of
    quantitatively
    recovering
    and
    quantifying
    total
    gaseous
    mercury
    from sorbent
    media
    is
    acceptable
    provided
    that
    the
    analysis
    can
    meet
    the
    performance
    criteria
    in
    Section
    8
    of
    this
    procedure.
    Candidate
    recovery
    techniques
    include
    leaching, digestion,
    and
    thermal
    desorption.
    Candidate
    anal’Vticäl
    iechni4ues
    include
    ultraviolet
    atomic
    fluorecôii
    ftJV
    AF);
    ultraviolet
    atomic
    absorption
    (UV
    AA),
    with
    and
    without
    gold
    trapping;
    and
    in•
    situ
    X-ray
    fluorescence
    (XRF)
    analysis.
    6.0
    Reagents
    and
    Standards.
    Only NIST-certified
    or
    NIST-traceable
    calibration
    gas
    standards
    and
    reagents
    must
    be
    used
    for
    the
    tests
    and
    procedures
    required
    under
    this
    Exhibit.
    7.0
    Sample
    Collection
    and
    Transport.
    85

    7.1 Pre-Test Procedures.
    7.1.1 Selection of SampiingSite.
    Sampling siteinformation shouldbe
    obtaiiiediaaccordancevwithMethod
    1
    in
    appendix
    A-i
    to
    40
    CFR
    60, incorporated by reference
    in Section 225.140.
    Identify
    a monitoring location
    representative
    of source mercury emissions. Locations shown to be free of stratification through
    measurement
    traverses
    for gases such as
    SO
    and
    NO
    may be one such approach. An estimation
    of the
    expected
    stack
    mercury
    concentration jçqired to establish a target sample flow
    rate, total
    gas
    sample
    volume, and the mass of Hg° to be spiked onto section 3 of each sorbent trap.
    7.1.2
    Pre-sampling Spiking of Sorbent Traps.
    Based on the estimated mercury
    concentration
    in
    the
    stack,
    the target
    sample rate and
    the
    target
    sampling duration,
    calculate the expected mass loading for section 1 of each sorbent
    trap
    (for
    an
    example calculation, see Section 11.1 of this Exhibit). The pre-sampling spike to be
    added to
    section
    3
    of each sorbent trap must be
    within
    +-
    50
    percent
    of the
    expected
    section
    1 mass loading.
    Spike
    section
    3
    of each sorbent
    trap
    at this level, as described
    in
    Section 5.2 of
    this Exhibit.
    For
    each
    sorbent trap, keep an
    official record of the mass of Hg° added to section 3. This
    record must
    include,
    at a minimum, the
    ID number of the trap, the date and time of the spike, the name
    of the
    analyst
    performing
    the
    procedure, the mass of Hg° added to section. 3 of the trap (rig), and the
    supporting
    calculations. This record must be maintained in a format suitable for inspection and audit
    and
    must
    be made
    available to the regulatory
    agencies
    upon
    request.
    7.1.3 Pre-test Leak Check
    Perform a leak check
    with the sorbent traps in place. Draw a vacuum in each sample train.
    Adjust
    the
    vacuum in the
    sample
    train to
    mercury. Using
    the gas flow meter, determine leak rate.
    The
    leakage
    rate
    must
    not exceed 4
    percent of the target sampling rate. Once the leak check
    passes this
    criterion,
    carefully release the
    vacuum in the
    sample
    train then
    seal the sorbent trap inlet
    until the
    probe
    is
    ready for
    insertion
    into the stack
    or duct.
    7.1.4 Determination of Flue Gas Characteristics.
    Determine or
    measure the
    flue gas
    measurement environment
    characteristics
    (gas
    temperature,
    static
    pressure, gas
    velocity, stack
    moisture,
    etc.)
    in
    order
    to determine ancillary
    requirements
    such
    as
    probe
    heating
    requirements
    (if
    any),
    initial sample
    rate, proportional sampling conditions,
    moisture
    management, etc.
    7.2 Sample Collection.
    7.2.1
    86

    Remove
    the
    plug
    from
    the
    end
    of
    each
    sorbent
    trap
    and
    store
    each
    plug
    in
    a
    clean
    sorbent
    trap
    storage
    container.
    Remove
    the
    stack
    or
    duct
    port
    cap
    and
    insert
    the
    probe(s).
    Secure
    the
    probe(s)
    and
    ensure
    that
    no
    leakage
    occurs
    between
    the
    duct
    and
    environment..
    7.2.2
    Record
    initial
    data including
    the
    sorbent
    trap
    ID,
    start
    time,
    starting
    dry
    gas
    meter
    readings,
    initial
    temperatures,
    set-points,
    and
    any
    other appropriate
    information.
    7.2.3
    Flow
    Rate
    Control
    Set
    the
    initial
    sample
    flow
    rate
    at
    the
    target
    value
    from
    Section
    7.1
    .1
    of
    this
    Exhibit.
    Record
    the
    initial
    gas
    flow meter
    reading,
    stack temperature
    (if
    needed
    to
    convert
    to
    standard
    conditions),
    meter
    temperatures
    (if
    needed),
    etc.
    Then,
    for
    every
    operating
    hour
    during
    the
    sampling
    period,
    record
    the
    date
    and
    time,
    the
    sample
    flow
    rate, the
    gas
    flow
    meter
    reading,
    the
    stack
    temperature
    (if
    needçj
    the
    flow
    meter temperatures
    (if
    needed),
    temperatures
    of
    heated
    equipment
    such
    as
    the
    vacuum
    lines.
    and the
    probes
    (if
    heated),
    and
    the
    sampling
    system
    vacuum
    readings.
    Also, record
    the
    stack
    gas
    flow
    rate,
    as
    measured
    by
    the
    certified
    flow
    monitor,
    and
    the
    ratio
    of
    the
    stack
    gas
    flow
    rate
    to
    the
    sample
    flow
    rate.
    Adjust
    the
    sampling
    flow
    rate
    to
    maintain
    proportional
    sampling,
    i.e.,
    keep
    the
    ratio
    of
    the
    stack
    gas
    flow
    rate
    to
    sample
    flow
    rate
    constant,
    to
    within
    +-25
    percent
    of
    the
    reference
    ratio
    from. the
    first•.
    hour of
    the
    data
    collection
    period
    (see
    Section
    11
    of
    this
    Exhibit).
    The
    sample
    flow
    rate
    through
    a
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system
    during
    any
    hour
    (or
    portion
    of
    an
    hour) in
    which
    the
    unit
    is
    not
    operating
    must
    be
    zero.
    7.2.4
    Stack
    Gas
    Moisture
    Determination
    Determine
    stack
    gas moisture
    using
    a
    continuous
    moisture
    monitoring
    system,
    as
    described
    in
    40
    CFR
    75.11(b).
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140.
    Alternatively,
    the
    owner
    or
    operator
    may
    use
    the
    appropriate
    fuel-specific
    moisture
    default
    value
    provided
    in
    40
    CFR 75.11,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    or
    a
    site-specific
    moisture
    default
    value
    approved
    by
    the
    Agency.
    7.2.5 Essential
    Operating
    Data
    Obtain
    and
    record
    any
    essential
    operating
    data
    for
    the
    facility
    during
    the
    test
    period,
    e.g.,
    the
    barometric
    pressure
    for correcting
    the
    sample
    volume
    measured
    by
    a
    dry
    gas
    meter
    to
    standard
    conditions.
    At
    the
    end
    of
    the
    data
    collection
    period,
    record
    the
    final
    gas
    flow
    meter
    reading
    and
    the
    final values
    of
    all
    other
    essential
    parameters.
    7.2.6
    Post
    Test Leak
    Check.
    When sampling
    is
    completed,
    turn
    off
    the
    sample
    pump,
    remove
    the
    probe/sorbent
    trap
    from
    the
    nort
    and carefully
    re-plug
    the
    end
    of
    each
    sorbent
    trap.
    Perform
    a
    leak
    check
    with
    the
    sorbent
    traps
    in
    87

    place,
    atthemaximurn
    vacuumreachedduring
    the’sampiiiig•’period.
    Useth’e same
    genera1äpproach
    described
    in
    Section
    7.1.3
    of this
    Exhibit.
    Record the
    leakage rate
    and
    vacuum.
    The
    leakage
    rate
    must not
    exceed 4
    percent
    of the
    average
    sampling rate
    for
    the
    data collection
    period.
    Following
    the
    leak check,
    carefully
    release
    the
    vacuum
    in
    the
    sample
    train
    7.17
    Sample
    Recovery.
    Recover
    each
    sampled
    sorbent
    trap
    by
    removing
    it
    from the
    probe, sealing
    both
    ends.
    Wipe
    any
    deposited
    material
    from
    the
    outside
    of
    the sorbent
    trap. Place
    the sorbent
    trap
    into
    an
    appropriate
    sample
    storage
    container
    and store/preserve
    in
    appropriate
    manner.
    7.2.8
    Sample
    Preservation,
    Storage,
    and
    Transport.
    While
    the
    performance
    criteria
    of this
    approach
    provide
    for
    verification
    of
    appropriate
    sample
    handling,
    it is still
    important
    that
    the
    user
    consider,
    determine,
    and
    plan for
    suitable
    sample
    preservation,
    storage,
    transport,
    and holding
    times for
    these measurements.
    Therefore,
    procedures
    in
    ASTM
    D691 1-03
    “Standard
    Guide
    for
    Packaging
    and
    Shipping Environmental
    Samples
    for
    Laboratory
    Analysis”
    (incorporated
    by
    reference
    under
    Section
    225.140)
    must
    be
    followed
    for all
    samples.
    7.2.9 Sample
    Custody.
    Proper
    procedures
    and
    documentation
    for
    sample
    chain
    of custody
    are
    critical
    to
    ensuring
    data
    integrity.
    The chain
    of custody
    procedures
    in ASTM
    D4840-99
    (reapproved
    2004) “Standard
    Guide
    for
    Sample
    Chain-of-Custody
    Procedures”
    (incorporated
    by
    reference
    under Section
    225.140)
    must
    be
    followed for
    all
    samples (including
    field
    samples
    and
    blanks).
    8.0
    Quality
    Assurance
    and
    Quality
    Control.
    Table K-i
    summarizes
    the
    OAJQC
    performance
    criteria
    that
    are used
    to validate
    the
    mercury
    emissions
    data
    from
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    systems,
    including
    the
    relative
    accuracy
    test
    audit
    (RATA)
    requirement
    (see
    Section
    1
    .4(c)(7),
    Section 6.5.6
    of Exhibit
    A
    to
    this
    Appendix,
    and
    Section
    2.3
    of Exhibit
    B to
    this
    Appendix).
    Except
    as
    provided
    in
    Section
    1.3(h)
    of this
    Appendix
    and
    as
    otherwise
    indicated
    in Table
    K-i, failure
    to achieve
    these
    performance
    criteria
    will
    result
    in
    invalidation
    of
    mercury
    emissions
    data.
    Table
    K-l.--Quality
    Assurance/Quality
    Control
    Criteria
    for
    Sorbent Trap
    Monitoring
    Systems
    QA/QC
    test
    or
    Acceptance
    criteria
    Frequency
    Consequences
    if
    specification
    not
    met
    Pre-test
    leak
    check
    <=4% of
    target
    sampling
    rate
    Prior
    to
    88

    Co
    H
    CD
    CD
    C)
    0
    CD
    Di
    H
    CD
    UI
    0
    CD
    Cr
    ((I
    Cr
    CD
    ‘-1
    Di
    10
    CD
    I-I
    CD
    C)
    0
    CD
    CD
    Cr
    CD
    CD
    Cr
    Dl
    Di
    CD
    CD
    S
    CD
    Ii
    Cr
    H
    0
    CD
    H
    Di
    Cr
    H
    CD
    Di
    Cr
    H
    0
    0
    I-h
    a]
    Cr
    Di
    C)
    Cr
    0
    a]
    Dl
    10
    Di
    Ci]
    Hi
    H
    0
    ‘-C
    Cr
    CD
    CD
    a]
    H
    Cr
    a]
    Dl
    ‘-C
    CD
    H
    a]
    0
    Di
    C)
    C)
    CD
    Cr
    Di
    H
    CD
    H-
    Hi
    0
    0)
    A
    I
    Di
    ‘-C
    CD
    Cr
    Di
    a]
    H-
    a]
    A
    A
    0
    H-
    Hi
    Cr
    CD
    C)
    0
    C)
    CD
    Cr
    ‘-C
    Di
    Cr
    H-
    0
    Ii
    a]
    Hi
    I-C
    0
    S
    0
    a]
    Cr
    CD
    a]
    Cl-
    H
    CD
    Di
    Di
    a]
    0
    H
    Cr
    CD
    H-
    Hi
    Hi
    CD
    i-C
    CD
    C)
    CD
    H-
    a]
    A
    A
    I
    Di
    CD
    ‘-C
    Di
    10
    CD
    C)
    0
    C)
    CD
    Cr
    ‘-C
    Di
    Cr
    0
    A
    0
    I-h
    Cli
    CD
    C)
    Cr
    H-
    0
    H
    0
    ‘-C
    Di
    Cr
    CD
    0
    OS
    HCD
    Cr
    PIDi
    Cr
    H
    001
    a]
    \O
    00
    I-CHi
    01Cr
    CD
    C)
    CD
    C)
    A
    0
    I-h
    Di
    CD
    I-C
    Di
    10
    CD
    CD
    H
    Dl
    Cr
    CD
    Hi
    1-C
    0
    S
    Cr
    CD
    0
    ‘-
    H
    1-C
    Di
    Cr
    H
    0
    a]
    1-C
    CD
    (12
    Cr
    ‘—C
    H-
    C)
    Cr
    H
    CD
    S
    Di
    1-C
    CD
    Hi
    CD
    i-C
    CD
    C-)
    CD
    I--C
    Dl
    Cr
    H
    0
    H-
    C)
    CD
    CD
    I-C
    H-
    a]
    H
    CD
    a]
    (12
    S
    0
    I-C
    CD
    Cr
    Di
    Lii
    CD
    ‘—C
    0
    I-C
    I-i-
    Di
    a]CD
    CD
    V
    1-C
    H
    DiDi
    H1Q
    Cr
    CD
    H
    0
    0
    C)
    AQ
    AC—
    SC)
    CDLi
    V
    ti—
    VCr
    10
    ‘-C
    H
    Di
    Hi
    5Cr
    H-
    Cr
    0
    LII
    CD
    I-C
    a]
    Di
    S
    H
    CD
    Lii
    H
    Cr
    LI
    CD
    ‘-C
    H
    :C
    Di
    H
    H
    ci
    Di
    Cr
    CD
    S
    Di
    a]
    a]
    LII
    CD
    I-C
    C)]
    Di
    H
    Iii
    *
    *
    CI)
    CD
    CD
    z
    0
    Cr
    CD
    Ia]
    Di
    S
    I-h
    Cr
    CD
    ‘-C
    I
    ci
    Di
    Cr
    C)
    0
    H
    H
    CD
    C)
    Cr
    H-
    0
    Cr
    I—C
    0
    -0
    0
    Cr
    CD
    ‘--C
    H-
    0
    ci
    rj
    *
    *
    CD
    H
    0
    C)
    IJ
    Cr
    ‘-C
    0
    Cr
    Cr
    0
    IH-
    I-C
    CD
    I-C
    Dia]
    CDCD
    C)
    ‘-C
    CDCD
    HCD
    DiDi
    Cr
    H-a]OH-Cr
    CLIICr
    ‘-CCDi
    DilO
    HiCrCD
    Cr
    ‘-C
    ciHi
    H-
    Cr0Cr
    ‘-C
    0
    LI5Cr0
    i
    CD
    CDI-C5
    Cr
    Di
    CD
    a]
    00
    10
    CD
    H
    0
    Di
    S
    H
    H
    CI)
    C)S
    0d
    S
    H
    S
    H
    CD
    CD5
    rt
    Cr
    H-
    b
    HO
    I

    C!)
    OHiI-
    WOF--D)
    OCDH
    rr
    Dii
    H
    Diii
    rt
    OCD
    ii-1
    iiH-CDCfl
    H-Hd
    0
    H-
    I—tnCD
    DJIICDW
    NH
    b(DO
    IlDhii
    CDCDii
    (DO0
    PrtOQ
    rrt
    iict
    H-CDHi
    H-
    ct1-’-CD
    Oii
    0
    O
    ‘iirt
    ii
    Diw
    —i
    Ui
    H-
    Di
    CDAp
    I
    HUiHib
    AH’A
    H
    luii
    CD
    0(D
    H-HiII
    M
    [—‘H-
    ‘CH’rt
    rtCHi
    Ui
    CD
    rtv(DM
    oW
    CD
    CDH-ii
    CDVQ
    +
    iiPi
    CI]
    PJC(I
    [i
    CD’
    0
    •i
    ‘Di
    H
    OOii
    U)—.O
    Hi
    0ii’
    POoW
    ‘H
    PIN
    ‘ii
    c
    CflCD
    (1]
    HCD
    OOti
    0
    0
    oW
    [O[
    (CIHioW
    Ah
    H
    tp
    -r
    ii
    ‘0
    (-trr
    Hi
    CD
    Hi
    OHCD
    ‘HiD)
    DiCDCD
    I-
    pi
    Di
    Ct
    Cl,
    Cl-
    oii
    [
    rtH
    0
    liii
    •o
    ‘CD
    ii
    CD
    Ct
    tLj
    0
    o
    <
    0
    Ii
    CtDiO[-
    CD
    HiDiOH
    CI]Pib’CD
    CflDiHiDiH
    ii’iiCD
    H-ii[DF-’
    DiiCDjrt
    OCI]iiH-iiO
    CDPIIH-
    (DD)H-H0
    DiHiD)ii
    [CDPCDDlh
    l-
    ct
    HHOH-
    I—’QH(D
    -‘H
    (DCDHH-
    C!)
    ()
    [b’H-
    H<[<
    (DO
    P’-<rt
    DhiiHirt
    Dl
    N
    I-j
    (DN(D02(1
    iiHi
    NO
    Hi
    i
    H’
    H-
    3
    CI]
    H-
    Cl-
    Di
    (I)
    H-
    H-
    Dl
    Ct
    H-
    CI)
    H
    DiI0rt
    ii
    Eli
    iiophii
    (DDIDJH
    H
    3Q
    H-
    •t
    .-
    3(D3
    CD
    OD)
    0
    CD
    F—’
    iiH-
    -CD
    Hi
    Cl
    rtF-’
    0
    CD
    H
    ii
    H-
    O(D
    Di
    CI]
    Li
    —,
    Dl
    CD
    Ct)
    H-
    Dirt
    CflDiWH-FO
    Diii
    bO[rtDl
    Ct)
    <Di
    (D*
    ctiiCDDi
    D
    CDCD•li
    H
    C!)
    H*
    ODiDiCl
    H
    OH
    CDH-O(Dpl
    Cl
    Cl-Hi
    O—’
    OHIiCDCDH-
    OH-
    iic-r0
    H
    CDh
    CD
    Cl
    Dib
    CDb
    CD’d
    cli
    30
    Cl)
    CIltI]DiCDC-t[j
    (l]-C
    3[CDCDN
    Di
    3
    CD
    DiH-Fhii
    Di
    CliDi
    CDH-CD
    3
    Dl
    CD
    HiCI]ClCl
    Ct
    Hirt
    CtDi<OCl
    CD
    CD
    CD
    CD
    H
    CDr
    H
    H
    1:3’
    i
    CT)
    CD
    0
    ‘ii
    it
    D
    ‘Ci
    Dl
    rl-ii
    Cl]
    rt
    rt
    Ii
    Cl)
    Ct
    CD
    H-
    Cl
    rt
    H-
    H
    H-
    H
    H
    C

    w
    i-
    Q
    Di
    CD
    Di
    PiO
    DiCDd
    Di
    F—’
    CD
    F-at-h
    f-a-CD
    --ri)
    brt
    bODi
    bO
    CD
    i1trt
    Dl
    i
    Dl
    Cl-
    Ct
    rtS
    I-’-
    CD
    cD
    0
    0
    Oct
    CD
    DiH-oCDQ
    (D-CDO
    lirt
    mDiH
    HrrDiH
    CD(Dc-t
    Ortc,j
    DicD
    0
    -ct
    (DDI
    CD
    CDiCD
    0
    rt
    Ct
    T(D
    i
    CD
    (DS
    (DO..
    fl+Qrt
    ci
    +0
    i
    ii
    (Di
    CD
    U
    t0rtbp
    OM,
    U?
    (fl—
    U
    (D•
    CD
    tit-I-.-
    CY(DCD
    C)
    Dirt
    h
    t-
    Oct
    Di
    (U
    0
    rt
    OH-
    rt
    i-
    t
    H-
    hbQt-
    H-
    0
    tCD
    0
    -
    10+
    Di
    11
    1
    Ct
    ci
    DiH-H-
    UI
    Ct
    tt
    ci
    H-rtCD
    1
    Ct0rt
    (DrtDlH-C-t
    CDrtDiH-(-t
    H-H
    DJCDC-tDio
    DiDirtDlO
    UIUItp)UIDiDl(D(DrtDi
    CD
    t-b
    H’
    C-tcFj
    H’
    CD
    rtDiH’—
    UIM,rt-
    I—’rt
    CUHH
    rti-’i--’
    0
    Dirt
    UIrtrt—’
    OUI
    CD
    (Dci
    Op-’-
    (DH-mci
    ii
    DlCn
    I-
    DiUi
    O
    I-hi-I
    Dicn
    i
    H’.
    DiUI(D
    Ct
    Ct
    0
    rtrt
    CD
    CD
    CD
    irtOSfl
    0D’
    CD
    CDCDpi
    (DO(DDi
    rtCflH’
    rt(D
    if-’
    H-il-f---’
    (nCr
    rtH-
    OCflH-
    H,(DH
    bI1b
    HU2Ob
    <CDH-i-b
    CDH
    Dirto
    -
    f-’O..
    Di
    HCDCDDiDi
    Di
    ciCDrt
    0
    rt
    cih
    rtrt
    DiciDiCD
    CDw
    CD
    Dirt.
    rti
    H-CDct
    H-Ct
    OCtrt
    0
    OH-
    Dl
    iH’O
    H-CDCD
    CI•
    H-
    (4
    UI
    UI
    —A

    C)
    xq
    I
    I
    I
    IL
    0
    0
    C)
    CD
    CD
    CD
    I
    H-
    H
    L’J
    i’J
    I:
    0
    CD
    CD
    C)
    0
    U)
    U)
    Ct
    (0
    CD
    Fb
    CD
    :CD
    ‘C)
    CD
    ‘CD
    ‘Cr
    :0
    0
    CD
    0)
    Cr
    CD
    0)
    Cr
    H
    CD
    0
    H
    Cr
    0
    H
    U)
    Cr
    CD
    0)
    CD
    0
    C)
    CD
    CD
    Cl)
    H
    C)
    CD
    0
    C
    C)
    p
    0
    Cl)
    0
    F-hO)
    OH
    (OF-b
    OCt
    rtCD
    H
    10
    i
    H
    CDP)
    I—,
    rtCD
    H-
    0
    d0
    i—t
    --
    rtrt
    CD
    d
    i-a
    0—
    H-
    Ct
    CDCD
    CtCD
    Ct
    CtU)
    (DO
    H
    CDrr
    U)(D
    (DO)
    H
    10
    Cr
    0h
    00)
    C)
    CD
    Cr
    rtCD
    H
    0
    U)
    CD
    H-
    U)
    rt
    CD*
    H-
    0
    hft
    (0
    F-b
    H
    U)Ct
    0)
    i-iCr
    CDi-i
    0)
    F-b
    0)
    H-
    H
    En
    rt
    0
    CD
    (0
    Ct
    H
    0)
    (1
    Cr
    H
    0
    0)
    0)
    C)
    C)
    CD
    Ct
    0)
    C)
    CD
    C)
    11
    H
    Ct
    (0
    I-I
    0)
    Cf
    CD
    0
    rr
    CD
    I-I
    0)
    H
    (0
    CD
    (0
    Cr
    S
    (0
    Ct
    Cf
    H-
    H
    U)
    (0
    C)
    H
    I-b
    H-
    C)
    Ct
    H
    0
    H-
    0)

    sorbent1rap
    monitorihg
    s
    ystem
    typicalfr
    operates.
    Ybtrrnay
    either
    follow
    theprocedures
    in
    SectiOn
    10.3.1
    of
    Method
    5 in
    appendix
    A-3
    to 40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225.140,
    or
    the
    procedures
    in Section
    16
    of Method
    5 in
    appendix
    A-3 to
    40
    CFR
    60.
    If
    a
    dry
    gas
    meter
    is
    being
    calibrated,:use
    at
    least
    five
    revolutions
    of
    themeter
    ateachfiow
    rate.
    9.2.2.2
    Alternative
    Initial
    Calibration.
    Procedures.
    Alternatively,
    you
    may
    perform
    the
    initial
    calibration
    of
    the
    gas
    flow
    meter
    using
    a
    reference
    gas
    flow meter
    (RGFM).
    The RGFM
    may
    either
    be:
    (1)
    A wet
    test meter
    calibrated
    according
    to
    Section
    10.3.1
    of Method
    5 in
    appendix
    A-3
    to 40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference
    in
    Section
    225. 140
    (2)
    a gas
    flow metering
    device
    calibrated
    at
    multiple
    flow rates
    using
    the procedures
    in Section
    16 of Metho4
    5 in appendix
    A-3 to
    40
    CFR
    60:
    or
    (3)
    a
    NIST-traceable
    calibration
    device
    capable
    of
    measuring
    volumetric
    flow
    to an
    accuracy
    of
    1
    percent.
    To calibrate
    the
    gas flow
    meter
    using
    the
    RGFM,
    proceed
    as
    follows:
    While
    the
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system
    is sampling
    the actual
    stack
    gas
    or a compressed
    gas
    mixture
    that
    simulates
    the
    stack
    gas
    composition
    (as
    applicable),
    connect
    the
    RGFM
    to
    the discharge
    of the
    system.
    Care
    should
    be taken
    to
    minimize
    the
    dead
    volume
    between
    the
    sample
    flow
    meter
    being
    tested
    and
    the
    RGFM.
    Concurrently
    measure
    dry
    gas
    volume
    with
    the RGFM
    and
    the
    flow
    meter
    being
    calibrated
    the for
    a minimum
    of 10
    minutes
    at
    each
    of three
    flow
    rates covering
    the typical
    range
    of
    operation
    of the
    sorbent
    trap
    monitoring
    system.
    For
    each 10-minute
    (or
    longer)
    data
    collection
    period,
    record
    the
    total sample
    volume,
    in
    units of
    dry
    standard
    cubic
    meters
    (dscm),
    measured
    by the
    RGFM
    and
    the
    .gas
    flow
    meter
    being tested.
    9.2.2.3
    Initial
    Calibration
    Factor.
    Calculate
    an
    individual
    calibration
    factor
    Yi
    at
    each
    tested
    flow
    rate
    from
    Section
    9.2.2.1
    or
    9.2.2:2
    of
    this Exhibit
    (as
    applicable),
    by
    taking
    the ratio
    of the
    reference
    sample
    volume
    to
    the
    sample
    volume
    recorded
    by the
    gas flow
    meter.
    Average
    the three
    Yi
    values,
    to
    determine
    Y,
    the
    calibration
    factor
    for the
    flow
    meter.
    Each
    of
    the three
    individual
    values
    of
    Yi
    must
    be
    within
    +-0.02
    of
    Y.
    Except
    as
    otherwise
    provided
    in
    Sections
    9.2.2.4
    and
    9.2.2.5
    of this
    Exhibit,
    use
    the
    average
    Y
    value
    from
    the three
    level
    calibration
    to adjust
    all
    subsequent
    gas
    volume
    measurements made
    with
    the gas
    flow
    meter.
    9.2.2.4
    Initial
    On-Site
    Calibration
    Check.
    For
    a
    mass
    flow
    meter
    that
    was
    initially
    calibrated
    using
    a
    compressed
    gas
    mixture,
    an
    on-site
    calibration
    check
    must
    be
    performed
    before
    using
    the
    flow
    meter
    to
    provide
    data
    for
    this
    part.
    While
    sampling
    stack
    gas, check
    the
    calibration
    of the flow
    meter
    at
    one
    intermediate flow
    rate
    typical
    of
    normal
    operation
    of
    the monitoring
    system.
    Follow
    the
    basic
    procedures
    in
    Section
    9.2.2.1
    or
    9.2.2.2
    of
    this Exhibit.
    If the
    on-site
    calibration
    check
    shows
    that
    the
    value
    of
    Yi, the
    calibration
    factor
    at the
    tested
    flow
    rate, differs
    by
    more
    than
    5 percent
    from
    the
    value
    of
    Y obtained
    in
    the initial
    calibration
    of the
    meter,
    repeat
    the full
    3-level
    calibration
    of the
    meter
    using
    stack
    gas to
    determine
    a new
    value
    of
    Y,
    and
    apply
    the
    new
    Y value
    to
    all
    subsequent
    93

    gasvohimemeastreneitsmadewith
    9.2.2.5
    Ongoing Quality
    Assurance.
    Recalibrate the
    gas
    flow
    meter quarterly at one
    intermediate
    flow
    rate
    setting
    representative
    of normaLoperationofthemonitoring
    system. Follow the
    basic
    procedures
    in
    Section
    9.2.2.1 or 9.2.2.2
    of this Exhibit. If a quarterly
    recalibration shows that the
    value
    of
    Yi,
    the
    calibration factor at
    the tested
    flow
    rate,
    differs from
    the
    current
    value of Y by more
    than
    5
    percent,
    repeat
    the
    full
    3-level calibration
    of the meter to determine
    a
    new value
    of Y, and apply
    the
    new
    Y
    value to all subsequent gas volume measurements
    made with the gas flow meter.
    9.3
    Thermocouples
    and Other
    Temperature Sensors.
    Use the procedures and
    criteria
    in Section 10.3
    of Method 2 in appendix A-i
    to 40
    CFR
    60,
    incorporated
    by
    reference in Section 225.140,
    to calibrate in-stack temperature
    sensors
    and
    thermocouples. Dial thermometers must be calibrated
    against
    mercury-in-glass
    thermometers.
    Calibrations must
    be performed
    prior
    to initial use and at least
    quarterly thereafter.
    At
    each
    calibration
    point,
    the absolute
    temperature
    measured
    by the temperature sensor
    must
    agree
    to
    within
    +-
    1.5 percent of the temperature measured with the
    reference sensor, otherwise the
    sensor
    may
    not
    continue
    to be used.
    9.4 Barometer.
    Calibrate against
    a mercury barometer.
    Calibration must be performed
    prior to initial use
    and
    at
    least
    quarterly
    thereafter. At each calibration
    point,
    the absolute pressure measured
    by
    the
    barometer
    must
    agree to
    within
    +-
    10 mm mercury of the
    pressure measured by the mercury
    barometer,
    otherwise
    the
    barometer may not continue to be used
    9.5 Other Sensors and Gauges.
    Calibrate
    all other
    sensors and
    gauges according
    to the
    procedures
    specified
    by the
    instrument
    manufacturer(s).
    9.6 Analytical
    System
    Calibration.
    See
    Section 10.1 of
    this Exhibit.
    10.0 Analytical Procedures.
    The
    analysis of the
    mercury samples
    may
    be conducted using
    any instrument or
    technology
    capable
    of
    quantifying total
    mercury from the
    sorbent media and meeting
    the
    performance
    criteria
    in
    Section
    8 of
    this Exhibit.
    94

    10.1
    Anai’yzer
    System
    C’alibration’
    Perform
    a
    multipoint
    calibration
    of
    the
    analyzer
    at
    three
    or
    more•
    upscale
    points
    over
    the
    desired
    quantitative
    range
    (multiple
    calibration
    ranges:mustbe
    calibrated,
    if
    necessary).
    The
    field
    samples
    analyzed
    must
    fall
    within
    a
    calibrated,
    quantitative
    range
    and
    meet
    the
    necessary
    performance
    criteria;:For
    samples
    that
    aresuitable
    for
    aliquotting,’.a
    series
    of
    dilutions
    may
    be
    needed
    to
    ensure
    that
    the samples
    fall
    within
    a
    calibrated
    range.
    However,
    for
    sorbent
    media
    samples
    that
    are
    consumed
    during
    analysis
    (e.g.,
    thermal
    desorption
    techniques),
    extra
    care
    must
    be
    taken
    to
    ensure
    that the
    analytical
    system
    is
    appropriately
    calibrated
    prior
    to
    sample
    analysis.
    The
    calibration
    curve
    range(s)
    should
    be
    determined
    based
    on
    the
    anticipated
    level
    of
    mercury
    mass
    on
    the
    sorbent
    media.
    Knowledge
    of
    estimated
    stack
    mercury
    concentrations
    and
    total
    sample
    volume
    may
    be
    required
    prior
    to
    analysis.
    The
    calibration
    curve
    for use
    with
    the
    various
    analytical
    techniques
    (e.g.,
    UV
    AA,
    UV AF,
    and
    XRF)
    can
    be
    generated
    by
    directly
    introducing
    standard
    solutions
    into
    the
    analyzer
    or
    by
    spiking
    the
    standards
    onto
    the
    sorbent
    media
    and
    then
    introducing
    into
    the
    analyzer
    after
    preparing
    the sorbent/standard
    according
    to
    the
    particular
    analytical
    technique.
    For
    each
    calibration
    curve,
    the
    value
    ofthe
    square
    of
    the
    linear
    correlation
    coefficient,
    i.e..
    r
    2
    ,
    must
    be
    >=
    0.99,
    and
    the
    analyzer
    response
    must
    be
    within
    +-
    10
    percent
    of
    reference
    value
    at
    each
    upscale
    calibration,
    point.
    Calibrations
    must
    be
    performed
    on
    the
    day
    of
    the
    analysis,
    before
    analyzing
    any
    of
    the
    samples.
    Following
    calibration,
    an
    independently
    prepared
    standard
    (not
    from
    same
    calibration
    stock
    solution)
    must
    be
    analyzed.
    The
    measured
    value
    of
    the
    independently
    prepared
    standard
    must
    be
    within
    +-
    10
    percent
    of
    the
    expected
    value.
    10.2
    Sample
    Preparation.
    Carefully
    separate
    the
    three
    sections
    of
    each
    sorbent
    trap.
    Combine
    for
    analysis
    all
    materials
    associated
    with each
    section,
    i.e.,
    any
    supporting
    substrate
    that
    the
    sample
    gas
    passes
    through
    prior
    to
    entering
    a
    media
    section
    (e.g.,
    glass
    wool,
    polyurethane
    foam,
    etc.)
    must
    be
    analyzed
    with
    that
    segment.
    10.3
    Spike
    Recovery
    Study.
    BJzr.
    afl41
    yzui,
    n
    v
    field
    samples,
    the
    laboratory
    must
    demonstrate
    the
    ability
    to
    recover
    and
    quantify
    mercury
    from
    the
    sorbe1L.
    diy
    performing
    the
    following
    spike
    recovery
    study
    for
    sorbent
    media
    traps
    spiked
    with
    elemental
    meic’:’.
    Using
    the
    procedures
    described
    in
    Sections
    5.2
    and 11.1
    of
    trim
    bit,
    spike
    the
    third
    section
    of
    nine
    sorbent
    traps
    with
    gaseous
    Hg°,
    i.e.,
    three
    traps
    at
    each
    of
    thre
    ‘ifferent
    mass
    loadings,
    representing
    the
    range
    of
    masses
    anticipated
    in
    the
    field
    samples.
    This
    will
    ye
    1
    da3
    x
    3
    sample
    matrix.
    Prepare
    and
    analyze
    the
    third
    section
    of
    each
    spiked
    trap,
    using
    the
    techniques
    that
    will
    be
    used
    to
    prepare
    and
    analyze
    the
    field
    samples.
    The
    average
    recovery
    for
    each
    spike
    concentration
    must
    be
    between
    85
    and
    115
    percent.
    If
    multiple
    types
    of
    sorb
    ent media
    are
    to
    be
    analyzed,
    a
    separate
    spike
    recovery
    study
    is
    required
    for
    each
    sorbent
    material.
    If
    multiple
    ranges
    are
    calibrated,
    a
    separate
    spike
    recovery
    study
    is
    required
    for
    each
    range.
    95

    10.4
    Field
    Sample
    Analysis
    Analyze.
    the
    sorbent t’sampiesfollowing’:thesarneprocedures::that
    were
    used:for;conducting
    the
    spike
    recovery
    study.
    The three sections of each sorbent
    trap must be analyzed separately
    (i.e.,
    section
    1, then section2, then section
    3)
    Quantify
    of
    mercury
    for
    each
    section
    based
    on analytical system response
    arid the calibration curve from
    Section
    10.1
    of this Exhibit.
    Determine
    the
    spike
    recovery from
    sorbent trap section 3. The spike recovery
    must be
    no
    less than
    75
    percent
    and
    no
    greater than 125
    percent.
    To report the final mercury mass for each trap, add
    together
    the
    mercury masses collected in trap sections 1 and 2.
    11.0 Calculations
    and
    Data
    Analysis.
    11.1
    Calculation of Pre-Sampling Spiking Level.
    Determine
    sorbent
    trap section 3 spiking level using estimates
    of the
    stack
    mercury
    concentration,
    the target
    sample flow rate, and the
    expected sample duration. First,
    calculate the
    expected
    mercury
    mass that will be collected in section
    1 of
    the
    trap. The pre-sampling spike must
    be within
    +-
    50
    percent of this mass. Example calculation: For an estimated
    stack
    mercury concentration
    of
    5
    ig/m
    3,
    a target sample rate of 0.30 L/min, and a sample duration of
    5
    days:
    (0.30
    L/min)
    (1440 rnin1day
    (5
    days) (10 3
    m
    /liter) (5pg/m3)= 10.8 ig
    A pre-sampling
    spike of 10.8
    .tg
    +-
    50percent is, therefore, appropriate.
    11.2 Calculations for Flow-Proportional
    Sampling.
    For
    the first hour of the data collection period, determine the reference
    ratio of the
    stack
    gas
    volumetric flow
    rate to
    the sample flow rate, as follows:
    KQ
    R
    ref
    ref
    (Equation
    K-i)
    ef
    Where:
    Rrej
    = Reference ratio of ho,
    stack gas flow rate to hourly
    sample flow rate
    rcf
    = Acrage stack gas volumetric
    flow rate for first hour of collection
    period
    ‘‘ref
    = Average
    sample
    flow rate for first hour
    of
    the
    collection period,
    in appropriate
    units
    (e.g.,
    liters/mm,
    cc/mm,
    dscmlmin)
    96

    K
    =
    Power
    of
    ten
    multiplier,
    to
    keep
    the
    value
    of
    Rrej
    between
    1
    and
    100.
    The,
    appropriate
    K
    value
    will
    depend
    on
    the
    selected
    units
    ofmeas.urefor
    the
    sample
    flow-rate...
    Then,
    for
    each
    subsequent
    hour
    of
    the
    data
    collection
    period,
    calculate
    ratio of the
    stack
    gas
    flow
    rate
    to
    the
    sample
    flow
    rate
    using
    the
    equation K-2:
    R,
    =
    (Equation
    K-2)
    Where:
    1
    R,
    Ratio
    of
    hourly
    stack
    gas
    flow
    rate
    to
    hourly
    sample
    flow
    rate
    Average
    stack
    gas
    volumetric
    flow
    rate
    for
    the
    hour
    F,
    Average
    sample
    flow
    rate
    for
    the
    hour,
    in
    appropriate
    units
    (e.g.,
    liters/mm,
    cc/mm,
    dscmJmjn)
    K
    =
    Power
    of
    ten
    multiplier,
    to
    keep
    the
    value
    of
    R,
    1
    between
    1 and
    100.
    The
    appropriate
    K
    value
    will
    depend
    on
    the
    selected
    units
    of
    measure
    for
    the
    sample
    flow
    rate
    and
    the
    range
    of
    expected
    stack
    gas
    flow
    rates.
    Maintain
    the
    value
    of
    Rh
    within
    +-
    25
    percent
    of
    Rrei
    throughout
    the
    data
    collection
    period.
    11.3
    Calculation
    of
    Spike
    Recovery.
    Calculate
    the
    percent
    recovery
    of
    each
    section
    3
    spike,
    as
    follows:
    %R
    =
    x
    100
    (Equation
    K-3)
    Where:
    %R=Percentage
    recovery
    of
    the
    pre-sampling
    spike
    =
    Mass
    of
    mercury
    recovered
    from
    section
    3 of
    the
    sorbent
    trap,
    (pg)
    97

    Calculated
    merctr
    rnassoftliepresampiii
    siik&frömSection
    .7
    :
    2of
    this Exhibit, (g
    11.4
    Calculation
    of Breakthrough.
    Calculate thepercent
    breakthrough
    to the secondsection
    of
    the sorbent trap, as follows:
    Where:
    %B
    = Mi
    x
    100
    (Equation
    Where:
    %B=
    Percent breakthrough
    = Mass of mercury
    recovered from
    section
    2
    of
    the sorbent
    trap,
    (JIg)
    M
    1
    Mass of
    mercury
    recovered
    from
    section
    1 of
    the sorbent
    trap,
    (pg)
    11.5 Calculation
    of Mercury
    Concentration
    Calculate the mercury
    concentration for
    each
    sorbent
    trap, using the following
    equation:
    C
    (Eiuation K-5)
    Where:
    C
    = Concentration of
    mercury for the collection
    period,
    jigmldscm)
    M*=
    Total mass
    of mercury recovered
    from
    sections
    1 and 2 of the
    sorbent trap,
    jig)
    = Total
    volume of
    dry
    gas
    metered during
    the collection period,
    (dscm).
    For
    the
    purposes
    of
    this
    Exhibit,
    standard
    temperature
    and pressure are defined
    as
    20
    C
    and 760 mm
    mercury,
    respectively.
    11.6 Calculation
    of Paired Trap
    Agreement
    Calculate
    the
    relative
    deviation
    (RD)
    between
    the mercury
    concentrations
    measured
    with
    the
    paired
    sorbent
    traps:
    98

    IC
    -Cb
    RD
    a
    ><
    (Equation
    K6)
    Ca+C&
    Wbere:
    RD
    Relative
    deviation between
    the
    mercury
    concentrations
    from
    traps
    “a”
    and
    “b”
    (percent)
    C
    0
    Concentration
    of
    mercury
    for
    the
    collection
    period,
    for
    sorbent
    trap
    “a” fligmldscm)
    Cb
    =
    Concentration
    of
    mercury
    for
    the
    collection
    period,
    for
    sorbent
    trap
    “b”
    (gmJdscm)
    11.7
    Calculation
    of
    Mercury
    Mass
    Emissions.
    To
    calculate
    mercury
    mass
    emissions,
    follow
    the
    procedures
    in
    Section
    4.1.2
    of
    Exhibit
    C
    to
    this
    Appendix.
    Use
    the
    average
    of
    the
    two
    mercury
    concentrations
    from
    the
    paired
    tps
    in
    the
    calculations,
    except
    as
    provided
    in
    Section
    2.2.3(h)
    of
    Exhibit
    B
    to
    this
    Appendix
    or
    in
    Table
    K-i.
    12.0
    Method
    Performance.
    These
    monitoring
    criteria
    and
    procedures
    have
    been
    applied
    to
    coal-fired
    utility
    boilers
    (including
    units
    with
    post-combustion
    emission
    controls), having
    vapor-phase
    mercury
    concentrations
    ranging
    from
    0.03 ,igldscm
    to
    100
    igJdscm.
    99

    Back to top